This action might not be possible to undo. Are you sure you want to continue?
www.lightandmatter.com
The Light and Matter series of
introductory physics textbooks:
1 Newtonian Physics
2 Conservation Laws
3 Vibrations and Waves
4 Electricity and Magnetism
5 Optics
6 The Modern Revolution in Physics
Benjamin Crowell
www.lightandmatter.com
Fullerton, California
www.lightandmatter.com
copyright 19982005 Benjamin Crowell
edition 2.2
rev. 8th December 2006
This book is licensed under the Creative Com
mons AttributionShareAlike license, version 1.0,
http://creativecommons.org/licenses/bysa/1.0/, except
for those photographs and drawings of which I am not
the author, as listed in the photo credits. If you agree
to the license, it grants you certain privileges that you
would not otherwise have, such as the right to copy the
book, or download the digital version free of charge from
www.lightandmatter.com. At your option, you may also
copy this book under the GNU Free Documentation
License version 1.2, http://www.gnu.org/licenses/fdl.txt,
with no invariant sections, no frontcover texts, and no
backcover texts.
ISBN 0970467036
To Diz and Bird.
Brief Contents
1 Vibrations 13
2 Resonance 25
3 Free Waves 47
4 Bounded Waves 75
Contents
1 Vibrations
1.1 Period, Frequency, and Amplitude . 15
1.2 Simple Harmonic Motion . . . . . 17
Why are sinewave vibrations so common?,
17.—Period is approximately independent
of amplitude, if the amplitude is small., 18.
1.3 Proofs . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
2 Resonance
2.1 Energy in Vibrations . . . . . . . 26
2.2 Energy Lost From Vibrations . . . 29
2.3 Putting Energy Into Vibrations . . . 31
2.4 Proofs . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Statement 2: maximum amplitude at
resonance, 40.—Statement 3: amplitude
at resonance proportional to Q, 40.—
Statement 4: FWHM related to Q, 40.
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
3 Free Waves
3.1 Wave Motion . . . . . . . . . . 49
1. Superposition, 49.—2. The medium is
not transported with the wave., 51.—3. A
wave’s velocity depends on the medium.,
52.—Wave patterns, 53.
3.2 Waves on a String. . . . . . . . 54
Intuitive ideas, 54.—Approximate
treatment, 55.—Rigorous derivation using
calculus (optional), 56.
3.3 Sound and Light Waves . . . . . 58
Sound waves, 58.—Light waves, 59
.
3.4 Periodic Waves . . . . . . . . . 60
Period and frequency of a periodic wave,
60.—Graphs of waves as a function of
position, 60.—Wavelength, 61.—Wave ve
locity related to frequency and wavelength,
61.—Sinusoidal waves, 63.
3.5 The Doppler Effect . . . . . . . 65
The Big Bang, 67.—What the big bang is
not, 68.
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
10
Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
4 Bounded Waves
4.1 Reﬂection, Transmission, and
Absorption. . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Reﬂection and transmission, 76.—
Inverted and uninverted reﬂections, 78.—
Absorption, 79.
4.2 Quantitative Treatment of Reﬂection 82
Why reﬂection occurs, 82.—Intensity of
reﬂection, 83.—Inverted and uninverted re
ﬂections in general, 84.
4.3 Interference Effects . . . . . . . 86
4.4 Waves Bounded on Both Sides . . 88
Musical applications, 90.—Standing
waves, 91.—Standingwave patterns of air
columns, 92.
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Appendix 1: Exercises 97
Appendix 2: Photo Credits 99
Appendix 3: Hints and Solutions 100
11
12
The vibrations of this electric bass
string are converted to electrical
vibrations, then to sound vibra
tions, and ﬁnally to vibrations of
our eardrums.
Chapter 1
Vibrations
Dandelion. Cello. Read those two words, and your brain instantly
conjures a stream of associations, the most prominent of which have
to do with vibrations. Our mental category of “dandelionness” is
strongly linked to the color of light waves that vibrate about half a
million billion times a second: yellow. The velvety throb of a cello
has as its most obvious characteristic a relatively low musical pitch
— the note you are spontaneously imagining right now might be
one whose sound vibrations repeat at a rate of a hundred times a
second.
Evolution has designed our two most important senses around
the assumption that not only will our environment be drenched with
informationbearing vibrations, but in addition those vibrations will
often be repetitive, so that we can judge colors and pitches by the
rate of repetition. Granting that we do sometimes encounter non
repeating waves such as the consonant “sh,” which has no recogniz
able pitch, why was Nature’s assumption of repetition nevertheless
so right in general?
Repeating phenomena occur throughout nature, from the orbits
of electrons in atoms to the reappearance of Halley’s Comet every 75
years. Ancient cultures tended to attribute repetitious phenomena
13
a / If we try to draw a non
repeating orbit for Halley’s
Comet, it will inevitably end up
crossing itself.
like the seasons to the cyclical nature of time itself, but we now
have a less mystical explanation. Suppose that instead of Halley’s
Comet’s true, repeating elliptical orbit that closes seamlessly upon
itself with each revolution, we decide to take a pen and draw a
whimsical alternative path that never repeats. We will not be able to
draw for very long without having the path cross itself. But at such
a crossing point, the comet has returned to a place it visited once
before, and since its potential energy is the same as it was on the
last visit, conservation of energy proves that it must again have the
same kinetic energy and therefore the same speed. Not only that,
but the comet’s direction of motion cannot be randomly chosen,
because angular momentum must be conserved as well. Although
this falls short of being an ironclad proof that the comet’s orbit must
repeat, it no longer seems surprising that it does.
Conservation laws, then, provide us with a good reason why
repetitive motion is so prevalent in the universe. But it goes deeper
than that. Up to this point in your study of physics, I have been
indoctrinating you with a mechanistic vision of the universe as a
giant piece of clockwork. Breaking the clockwork down into smaller
and smaller bits, we end up at the atomic level, where the electrons
circling the nucleus resemble — well, little clocks! From this point
of view, particles of matter are the fundamental building blocks
of everything, and vibrations and waves are just a couple of the
tricks that groups of particles can do. But at the beginning of
the 20th century, the tabled were turned. A chain of discoveries
initiated by Albert Einstein led to the realization that the socalled
subatomic “particles” were in fact waves. In this new worldview,
it is vibrations and waves that are fundamental, and the formation
of matter is just one of the tricks that waves can do.
14 Chapter 1 Vibrations
c / Example 1.
b / A spring has an equilib
rium length, 1, and can be
stretched, 2, or compressed, 3. A
mass attached to the spring can
be set into motion initially, 4, and
will then vibrate, 413.
1.1 Period, Frequency, and Amplitude
Figure b shows our most basic example of a vibration. With no
forces on it, the spring assumes its equilibrium length, b/1. It can
be stretched, 2, or compressed, 3. We attach the spring to a wall
on the left and to a mass on the right. If we now hit the mass with
a hammer, 4, it oscillates as shown in the series of snapshots, 413.
If we assume that the mass slides back and forth without friction
and that the motion is onedimensional, then conservation of energy
proves that the motion must be repetitive. When the block comes
back to its initial position again, 7, its potential energy is the same
again, so it must have the same kinetic energy again. The motion
is in the opposite direction, however. Finally, at 10, it returns to its
initial position with the same kinetic energy and the same direction
of motion. The motion has gone through one complete cycle, and
will now repeat forever in the absence of friction.
The usual physics terminology for motion that repeats itself over
and over is periodic motion, and the time required for one repetition
is called the period, T. (The symbol P is not used because of the
possible confusion with momentum.) One complete repetition of the
motion is called a cycle.
We are used to referring to shortperiod sound vibrations as
“high” in pitch, and it sounds odd to have to say that high pitches
have low periods. It is therefore more common to discuss the rapid
ity of a vibration in terms of the number of vibrations per second,
a quantity called the frequency, f. Since the period is the number
of seconds per cycle and the frequency is the number of cycles per
second, they are reciprocals of each other,
f = 1/T .
A carnival game example 1
In the carnival game shown in ﬁgure c, the rube is supposed to push the
bowling ball on the track just hard enough so that it goes over the hump
and into the valley, but does not come back out again. If the only types
of energy involved are kinetic and potential, this is impossible. Suppose
you expect the ball to come back to a point such as the one shown with
the dashed outline, then stop and turn around. It would already have
passed through this point once before, going to the left on its way into
the valley. It was moving then, so conservation of energy tells us that it
cannot be at rest when it comes back to the same point. The motion that
the customer hopes for is physically impossible. There is a physically
possible periodic motion in which the ball rolls back and forth, staying
conﬁned within the valley, but there is no way to get the ball into that
motion beginning from the place where we start. There is a way to beat
the game, though. If you put enough spin on the ball, you can create
enough kinetic friction so that a signiﬁcant amount of heat is generated.
Conservation of energy then allows the ball to be at rest when it comes
back to a point like the outlined one, because kinetic energy has been
converted into heat.
Section 1.1 Period, Frequency, and Amplitude 15
d / 1. The amplitude of the
vibrations of the mass on a spring
could be deﬁned in two different
ways. It would have units of
distance. 2. The amplitude of a
swinging pendulum would more
naturally be deﬁned as an angle.
Period and frequency of a ﬂy’s wingbeats example 2
A Victorian parlor trick was to listen to the pitch of a ﬂy’s buzz, reproduce
the musical note on the piano, and announce how many times the ﬂy’s
wings had ﬂapped in one second. If the ﬂy’s wings ﬂap, say, 200 times in
one second, then the frequency of their motion is f = 200/1 s = 200 s
−1
.
The period is one 200th of a second, T = 1/f = (1/200) s = 0.005 s.
Units of inverse second, s
−1
, are awkward in speech, so an abbre
viation has been created. One Hertz, named in honor of a pioneer
of radio technology, is one cycle per second. In abbreviated form,
1 Hz = 1 s
−1
. This is the familiar unit used for the frequencies on
the radio dial.
Frequency of a radio station example 3
KKJZ’s frequency is 88.1 MHz. What does this mean, and what period
does this correspond to?
The metric preﬁx M is mega, i.e., millions. The radio waves emitted
by KKJZ’s transmitting antenna vibrate 88.1 million times per second.
This corresponds to a period of
T = 1/f = 1.14 ×10
−8
s .
This example shows a second reason why we normally speak in terms
of frequency rather than period: it would be painful to have to refer to
such small time intervals routinely. I could abbreviate by telling people
that KKJZ’s period was 11.4 nanoseconds, but most people are more
familiar with the big metric preﬁxes than with the small ones.
Units of frequency are also commonly used to specify the speeds
of computers. The idea is that all the little circuits on a computer
chip are synchronized by the very fast ticks of an electronic clock, so
that the circuits can all cooperate on a task without getting ahead
or behind. Adding two numbers might require, say, 30 clock cycles.
Microcomputers these days operate at clock frequencies of about a
gigahertz.
We have discussed how to measure how fast something vibrates,
but not how big the vibrations are. The general term for this is
amplitude, A. The deﬁnition of amplitude depends on the system
being discussed, and two people discussing the same system may
not even use the same deﬁnition. In the example of the block on the
end of the spring, d/1, the amplitude will be measured in distance
units such as cm. One could work in terms of the distance traveled
by the block from the extreme left to the extreme right, but it
would be somewhat more common in physics to use the distance
from the center to one extreme. The former is usually referred to as
the peaktopeak amplitude, since the extremes of the motion look
like mountain peaks or upsidedown mountain peaks on a graph of
position versus time.
In other situations we would not even use the same units for am
plitude. The amplitude of a child on a swing, or a pendulum, d/2,
would most conveniently be measured as an angle, not a distance,
16 Chapter 1 Vibrations
e / Sinusoidal and nonsinusoidal
vibrations.
since her feet will move a greater distance than her head. The elec
trical vibrations in a radio receiver would be measured in electrical
units such as volts or amperes.
1.2 Simple Harmonic Motion
Why are sinewave vibrations so common?
If we actually construct the massonaspring system discussed
in the previous section and measure its motion accurately, we will
ﬁnd that its x−t graph is nearly a perfect sinewave shape, as shown
in ﬁgure e/1. (We call it a “sine wave” or “sinusoidal” even if it is
a cosine, or a sine or cosine shifted by some arbitrary horizontal
amount.) It may not be surprising that it is a wiggle of this general
sort, but why is it a speciﬁc mathematically perfect shape? Why is
it not a sawtooth shape like 2 or some other shape like 3? The mys
tery deepens as we ﬁnd that a vast number of apparently unrelated
vibrating systems show the same mathematical feature. A tuning
fork, a sapling pulled to one side and released, a car bouncing on
its shock absorbers, all these systems will exhibit sinewave motion
under one condition: the amplitude of the motion must be small.
It is not hard to see intuitively why extremes of amplitude would
act diﬀerently. For example, a car that is bouncing lightly on its
shock absorbers may behave smoothly, but if we try to double the
amplitude of the vibrations the bottom of the car may begin hitting
the ground, e/4. (Although we are assuming for simplicity in this
chapter that energy is never dissipated, this is clearly not a very
realistic assumption in this example. Each time the car hits the
ground it will convert quite a bit of its potential and kinetic en
ergy into heat and sound, so the vibrations would actually die out
quite quickly, rather than repeating for many cycles as shown in the
ﬁgure.)
The key to understanding how an object vibrates is to know how
the force on the object depends on the object’s position. If an object
is vibrating to the right and left, then it must have a leftward force
on it when it is on the right side, and a rightward force when it is on
the left side. In one dimension, we can represent the direction of the
force using a positive or negative sign, and since the force changes
from positive to negative there must be a point in the middle where
the force is zero. This is the equilibrium point, where the object
would stay at rest if it was released at rest. For convenience of
notation throughout this chapter, we will deﬁne the origin of our
coordinate system so that x equals zero at equilibrium.
Section 1.2 Simple Harmonic Motion 17
g / Seen from close up, any
F −x curve looks like a line.
f / The force exerted by an
ideal spring, which behaves
exactly according to Hooke’s law.
The simplest example is the mass on a spring, for which force
on the mass is given by Hooke’s law,
F = −kx .
We can visualize the behavior of this force using a graph of F versus
x, as shown in ﬁgure f. The graph is a line, and the spring constant,
k, is equal to minus its slope. A stiﬀer spring has a larger value of
k and a steeper slope. Hooke’s law is only an approximation, but
it works very well for most springs in real life, as long as the spring
isn’t compressed or stretched so much that it is permanently bent
or damaged.
The following important theorem, whose proof is given in op
tional section 1.3, relates the motion graph to the force graph.
Theorem: A linear force graph makes a sinusoidal motion
graph.
If the total force on a vibrating object depends only on the
object’s position, and is related to the objects displacement
from equilibrium by an equation of the form F = −kx, then
the object’s motion displays a sinusoidal graph with period
T = 2π
_
m/k.
Even if you do not read the proof, it is not too hard to understand
why the equation for the period makes sense. A greater mass causes
a greater period, since the force will not be able to whip a massive
object back and forth very rapidly. A larger value of k causes a
shorter period, because a stronger force can whip the object back
and forth more rapidly.
This may seem like only an obscure theorem about the masson
aspring system, but ﬁgure g shows it to be far more general than
that. Figure g/1 depicts a force curve that is not a straight line. A
system with this F −x curve would have largeamplitude vibrations
that were complex and not sinusoidal. But the same system would
exhibit sinusoidal smallamplitude vibrations. This is because any
curve looks linear from very close up. If we magnify the F − x
graph as shown in ﬁgure g/2, it becomes very diﬃcult to tell that
the graph is not a straight line. If the vibrations were conﬁned to
the region shown in g/2, they would be very nearly sinusoidal. This
is the reason why sinusoidal vibrations are a universal feature of
all vibrating systems, if we restrict ourselves to small amplitudes.
The theorem is therefore of great general signiﬁcance. It applies
throughout the universe, to objects ranging from vibrating stars to
vibrating nuclei. A sinusoidal vibration is known as simple harmonic
motion.
Period is approximately independent of amplitude, if the
amplitude is small.
Until now we have not even mentioned the most counterintu
itive aspect of the equation T = 2π
_
m/k: it does not depend on
18 Chapter 1 Vibrations
amplitude at all. Intuitively, most people would expect the masson
aspring system to take longer to complete a cycle if the amplitude
was larger. (We are comparing amplitudes that are diﬀerent from
each other, but both small enough that the theorem applies.) In
fact the largeramplitude vibrations take the same amount of time
as the smallamplitude ones. This is because at large amplitudes,
the force is greater, and therefore accelerates the object to higher
speeds.
Legend has it that this fact was ﬁrst noticed by Galileo during
what was apparently a less than enthralling church service. A gust
of wind would now and then start one of the chandeliers in the
cathedral swaying back and forth, and he noticed that regardless
of the amplitude of the vibrations, the period of oscillation seemed
to be the same. Up until that time, he had been carrying out his
physics experiments with such crude timemeasuring techniques as
feeling his own pulse or singing a tune to keep a musical beat. But
after going home and testing a pendulum, he convinced himself that
he had found a superior method of measuring time. Even without
a fancy system of pulleys to keep the pendulum’s vibrations from
dying down, he could get very accurate time measurements, because
the gradual decrease in amplitude due to friction would have no
eﬀect on the pendulum’s period. (Galileo never produced a modern
style pendulum clock with pulleys, a minute hand, and a second
hand, but within a generation the device had taken on the form
that persisted for hundreds of years after.)
The pendulum example 4
Compare the periods of pendula having bobs with different masses.
From the equation T = 2π
_
m/k, we might expect that a larger mass
would lead to a longer period. However, increasing the mass also in
creases the forces that act on the pendulum: gravity and the tension in
the string. This increases k as well as m, so the period of a pendulum
is independent of m.
Section 1.2 Simple Harmonic Motion 19
h / The object moves along
the circle at constant speed,
but even though its overall
speed is constant, the x and y
components of its velocity are
continuously changing, as shown
by the unequal spacing of the
points when projected onto the
line below. Projected onto the
line, its motion is the same as
that of an object experiencing a
force F = −kx.
1.3 Proofs
In this section we prove (1) that a linear F − x graph gives
sinusoidal motion, (2) that the period of the motion is 2π
_
m/k,
and (3) that the period is independent of the amplitude. You may
omit this section without losing the continuity of the chapter.
The basic idea of the proof can be understood by imagining
that you are watching a child on a merrygoround from far away.
Because you are in the same horizontal plane as her motion, she
appears to be moving from side to side along a line. Circular motion
viewed edgeon doesn’t just look like any kind of backandforth
motion, it looks like motion with a sinusoidal x−t graph, because the
sine and cosine functions can be deﬁned as the x and y coordinates
of a point at angle θ on the unit circle. The idea of the proof, then,
is to show that an object acted on by a force that varies as F = −kx
has motion that is identical to circular motion projected down to
one dimension. The equation will also fall out nicely at the end.
For an object performing uniform circular motion, we have
a =
v
2
r
.
The x component of the acceleration is therefore
a
x
=
v
2
r
cos θ ,
where θ is the angle measured counterclockwise from the x axis.
Applying Newton’s second law,
F
x
m
= −
v
2
r
cos θ , so
F
x
= −m
v
2
r
cos θ .
Since our goal is an equation involving the period, it is natural to
eliminate the variable v = circumference/T = 2πr/T, giving
F
x
= −
4π
2
mr
T
2
cos θ .
The quantity r cos θ is the same as x, so we have
F
x
= −
4π
2
m
T
2
x .
Since everything is constant in this equation except for x, we have
proved that motion with force proportional to x is the same as circu
lar motion projected onto a line, and therefore that a force propor
tional to x gives sinusoidal motion. Finally, we identify the constant
factor of 4π
2
m/T
2
with k, and solving for T gives the desired equa
tion for the period,
T = 2π
_
m
k
.
Since this equation is independent of r, T is independent of the
amplitude, subject to the initial assumption of perfect F = −kx
behavior, which in reality will only hold approximately for small x.
20 Chapter 1 Vibrations
The moons of Jupiter. example 5
The idea behind this proof is aptly illustrated by the moons of Jupiter.
Their discovery by Galileo was an epochal event in astronomy, because
it proved that not everything in the universe had to revolve around the
earth as had been believed. Galileo’s telescope was of poor quality by
modern standards, but ﬁgure i shows a simulation of how Jupiter and its
moons might appear at intervals of three hours through a large present
day instrument. Because we see the moons’ circular orbits edgeon,
they appear to perform sinusoidal vibrations. Over this time period, the
innermost moon, Io, completes half a cycle.
i / Example 5.
Section 1.3 Proofs 21
Summary
Selected Vocabulary
periodic motion . motion that repeats itself over and over
period . . . . . . . the time required for one cycle of a periodic
motion
frequency . . . . . the number of cycles per second, the inverse of
the period
amplitude . . . . the amount of vibration, often measured from
the center to one side; may have diﬀerent units
depending on the nature of the vibration
simple harmonic
motion . . . . . .
motion whose x −t graph is a sine wave
Notation
T . . . . . . . . . period
f . . . . . . . . . . frequency
A . . . . . . . . . amplitude
k . . . . . . . . . . the slope of the graph of F versus x, where
F is the total force acting on an object and
x is the object’s position; For a spring, this is
known as the spring constant.
Other Terminology and Notation
ν . . . . . . . . . . The Greek letter ν, nu, is used in many books
for frequency.
ω . . . . . . . . . . The Greek letter ω, omega, is often used as an
abbreviation for 2πf.
Summary
Periodic motion is common in the world around us because of
conservation laws. An important example is onedimensional motion
in which the only two forms of energy involved are potential and
kinetic; in such a situation, conservation of energy requires that an
object repeat its motion, because otherwise when it came back to
the same point, it would have to have a diﬀerent kinetic energy and
therefore a diﬀerent total energy.
Not only are periodic vibrations very common, but smallamplitude
vibrations are always sinusoidal as well. That is, the x−t graph is a
sine wave. This is because the graph of force versus position will al
ways look like a straight line on a suﬃciently small scale. This type
of vibration is called simple harmonic motion. In simple harmonic
motion, the period is independent of the amplitude, and is given by
T = 2π
_
m/k .
22 Chapter 1 Vibrations
Problem 4.
Problems
Key
√
A computerized answer check is available online.
_
A problem that requires calculus.
A diﬃcult problem.
1 Find an equation for the frequency of simple harmonic motion
in terms of k and m.
2 Many singlecelled organisms propel themselves through water
with long tails, which they wiggle back and forth. (The most obvious
example is the sperm cell.) The frequency of the tail’s vibration is
typically about 1015 Hz. To what range of periods does this range
of frequencies correspond?
3 (a) Pendulum 2 has a string twice as long as pendulum 1. If
we deﬁne x as the distance traveled by the bob along a circle away
from the bottom, how does the k of pendulum 2 compare with the
k of pendulum 1? Give a numerical ratio. [Hint: the total force
on the bob is the same if the angles away from the bottom are the
same, but equal angles do not correspond to equal values of x.]
(b) Based on your answer from part (a), how does the period of pen
dulum 2 compare with the period of pendulum 1? Give a numerical
ratio.
4 A pneumatic spring consists of a piston riding on top of the
air in a cylinder. The upward force of the air on the piston is
given by F
air
= ax
−1.4
, where a is a constant with funny units of
N· m
1.4
. For simplicity, assume the air only supports the weight,
F
W
, of the piston itself, although in practice this device is used to
support some other object. The equilibrium position, x
0
, is where
F
W
equals −F
air
. (Note that in the main text I have assumed
the equilibrium position to be at x = 0, but that is not the natural
choice here.) Assume friction is negligible, and consider a case where
the amplitude of the vibrations is very small. Let a = 1 N· m
1.4
,
x
0
= 1.00 m, and F
W
= −1.00 N. The piston is released from
x = 1.01 m. Draw a neat, accurate graph of the total force, F, as a
function of x, on graph paper, covering the range from x = 0.98 m
to 1.02 m. Over this small range, you will ﬁnd that the force is
very nearly proportional to x − x
0
. Approximate the curve with a
straight line, ﬁnd its slope, and derive the approximate period of
oscillation.
√
5 Consider the same pneumatic piston described in problem 4,
but now imagine that the oscillations are not small. Sketch a graph
of the total force on the piston as it would appear over this wider
range of motion. For a wider range of motion, explain why the
vibration of the piston about equilibrium is not simple harmonic
motion, and sketch a graph of x vs t, showing roughly how the
curve is diﬀerent from a sine wave. [Hint: Acceleration corresponds
Problems 23
Problem 7.
to the curvature of the x − t graph, so if the force is greater, the
graph should curve around more quickly.]
6 Archimedes’ principle states that an object partly or wholly
immersed in ﬂuid experiences a buoyant force equal to the weight
of the ﬂuid it displaces. For instance, if a boat is ﬂoating in water,
the upward pressure of the water (vector sum of all the forces of
the water pressing inward and upward on every square inch of its
hull) must be equal to the weight of the water displaced, because
if the boat was instantly removed and the hole in the water ﬁlled
back in, the force of the surrounding water would be just the right
amount to hold up this new “chunk” of water. (a) Show that a cube
of mass m with edges of length b ﬂoating upright (not tilted) in a
ﬂuid of density ρ will have a draft (depth to which it sinks below
the waterline) h given at equilibrium by h
0
= m/b
2
ρ. (b) Find the
total force on the cube when its draft is h, and verify that plugging
in h − h
0
gives a total force of zero. (c) Find the cube’s period of
oscillation as it bobs up and down in the water, and show that can
be expressed in terms of and g only.
7 The ﬁgure shows a seesaw with two springs at Codornices Park
in Berkeley, California. Each spring has spring constant k, and a
kid of mass m sits on each seat. (a) Find the period of vibration in
terms of the variables k, m, a, and b. (b) Discuss the special case
where a = b, rather than a > b as in the real seesaw. (c) Show that
your answer to part a also makes sense in the case of b = 0.
8 Show that the equation T = 2π
_
m/k has units that make
sense.
9 A hot scientiﬁc question of the 18th century was the shape of
the earth: whether its radius was greater at the equator than at the
poles, or the other way around. One method used to attack this
question was to measure gravity accurately in diﬀerent locations
on the earth using pendula. If the highest and lowest latitudes
accessible to explorers were 0 and 70 degrees, then the the strength
of gravity would in reality be observed to vary over a range from
about 9.780 to 9.826 m/s
2
. This change, amounting to 0.046 m/s
2
,
is greater than the 0.022 m/s
2
eﬀect to be expected if the earth
had been spherical. The greater eﬀect occurs because the equator
feels a reduction due not just to the acceleration of the spinning
earth out from under it, but also to the greater radius of the earth
at the equator. What is the accuracy with which the period of a
onesecond pendulum would have to be measured in order to prove
that the earth was not a sphere, and that it bulged at the equator?
24 Chapter 1 Vibrations
Top: A series of images from
a ﬁlm of the Tacoma Narrows
Bridge vibrating on the day it was
to collapse. Middle: The bridge
immediately before the collapse,
with the sides vibrating 8.5 me
ters (28 feet) up and down. Note
that the bridge is over a mile long.
Bottom: During and after the ﬁ
nal collapse. The righthand pic
ture gives a sense of the massive
scale of the construction.
Chapter 2
Resonance
Soon after the milelong Tacoma Narrows Bridge opened in July
1940, motorists began to notice its tendency to vibrate frighteningly
in even a moderate wind. Nicknamed “Galloping Gertie,” the bridge
collapsed in a steady 42mileperhour wind on November 7 of the
same year. The following is an eyewitness report from a newspaper
editor who found himself on the bridge as the vibrations approached
the breaking point.
“Just as I drove past the towers, the bridge began to sway vi
olently from side to side. Before I realized it, the tilt became so
violent that I lost control of the car... I jammed on the brakes and
25
got out, only to be thrown onto my face against the curb.
“Around me I could hear concrete cracking. I started to get my
dog Tubby, but was thrown again before I could reach the car. The
car itself began to slide from side to side of the roadway.
“On hands and knees most of the time, I crawled 500 yards or
more to the towers... My breath was coming in gasps; my knees
were raw and bleeding, my hands bruised and swollen from gripping
the concrete curb... Toward the last, I risked rising to my feet and
running a few yards at a time... Safely back at the toll plaza, I
saw the bridge in its ﬁnal collapse and saw my car plunge into the
Narrows.”
The ruins of the bridge formed an artiﬁcial reef, one of the
world’s largest. It was not replaced for ten years. The reason for
its collapse was not substandard materials or construction, nor was
the bridge underdesigned: the piers were hundredfoot blocks of
concrete, the girders massive and made of carbon steel. The bridge
was destroyed because of the physical phenomenon of resonance,
the same eﬀect that allows an opera singer to break a wine glass
with her voice and that lets you tune in the radio station you want.
The replacement bridge, which has lasted half a century so far, was
built smarter, not stronger. The engineers learned their lesson and
simply included some slight modiﬁcations to avoid the resonance
phenomenon that spelled the doom of the ﬁrst one.
2.1 Energy in Vibrations
One way of describing the collapse of the bridge is that the bridge
kept taking energy from the steadily blowing wind and building up
more and more energetic vibrations. In this section, we discuss the
energy contained in a vibration, and in the subsequent sections we
will move on to the loss of energy and the adding of energy to a
vibrating system, all with the goal of understanding the important
phenomenon of resonance.
Going back to our standard example of a mass on a spring, we
ﬁnd that there are two forms of energy involved: the potential energy
stored in the spring and the kinetic energy of the moving mass. We
may start the system in motion either by hitting the mass to put in
kinetic energy by pulling it to one side to put in potential energy.
Either way, the subsequent behavior of the system is identical. It
trades energy back and forth between kinetic and potential energy.
(We are still assuming there is no friction, so that no energy is
converted to heat, and the system never runs down.)
The most important thing to understand about the energy con
tent of vibrations is that the total energy is proportional to the
26 Chapter 2 Resonance
a / Example 1.
square of the amplitude. Although the total energy is constant, it
is instructive to consider two speciﬁc moments in the motion of the
mass on a spring as examples. When the mass is all the way to
one side, at rest and ready to reverse directions, all its energy is
potential. We have already seen that the potential energy stored
in a spring equals (1/2)kx
2
, so the energy is proportional to the
square of the amplitude. Now consider the moment when the mass
is passing through the equilibrium point at x = 0. At this point it
has no potential energy, but it does have kinetic energy. The veloc
ity is proportional to the amplitude of the motion, and the kinetic
energy, (1/2)mv
2
, is proportional to the square of the velocity, so
again we ﬁnd that the energy is proportional to the square of the
amplitude. The reason for singling out these two points is merely
instructive; proving that energy is proportional to A
2
at any point
would suﬃce to prove that energy is proportional to A
2
in general,
since the energy is constant.
Are these conclusions restricted to the massonaspring exam
ple? No. We have already seen that F = −kx is a valid approxima
tion for any vibrating object, as long as the amplitude is small. We
are thus left with a very general conclusion: the energy of any vibra
tion is approximately proportional to the square of the amplitude,
provided that the amplitude is small.
Water in a Utube example 1
If water is poured into a Ushaped tube as shown in the ﬁgure, it can
undergo vibrations about equilibrium. The energy of such a vibration is
most easily calculated by considering the “turnaround point” when the
water has stopped and is about to reverse directions. At this point, it
has only potential energy and no kinetic energy, so by calculating its
potential energy we can ﬁnd the energy of the vibration. This potential
energy is the same as the work that would have to be done to take the
water out of the righthand side down to a depth A below the equilibrium
level, raise it through a height A, and place it in the lefthand side. The
weight of this chunk of water is proportional to A, and so is the height
through which it must be lifted, so the energy is proportional to A
2
.
The range of energies of sound waves example 2
The amplitude of vibration of your eardrum at the threshold of pain
is about 10
6
times greater than the amplitude with which it vibrates in
response to the softest sound you can hear. How many times greater is
the energy with which your ear has to cope for the painfully loud sound,
compared to the soft sound?
The amplitude is 10
6
times greater, and energy is proportional to the
square of the amplitude, so the energy is greater by a factor of 10
12
.
This is a phenomenally large factor!
We are only studying vibrations right now, not waves, so we are
not yet concerned with how a sound wave works, or how the energy
gets to us through the air. Note that because of the huge range of
Section 2.1 Energy in Vibrations 27
energies that our ear can sense, it would not be reasonable to have
a sense of loudness that was additive. Consider, for instance, the
following three levels of sound:
barely audible wind
quiet conversation . . . . 10
5
times more energy than the
wind
heavy metal concert . . 10
12
times more energy than the
wind
In terms of addition and subtraction, the diﬀerence between the
wind and the quiet conversation is nothing compared to the diﬀer
ence between the quiet conversation and the heavy metal concert.
Evolution wanted our sense of hearing to be able to encompass all
these sounds without collapsing the bottom of the scale so that any
thing softer than the crack of doom would sound the same. So rather
than making our sense of loudness additive, mother nature made it
multiplicative. We sense the diﬀerence between the wind and the
quiet conversation as spanning a range of about 5/12 as much as the
whole range from the wind to the heavy metal concert. Although
a detailed discussion of the decibel scale is not relevant here, the
basic point to note about the decibel scale is that it is logarithmic.
The zero of the decibel scale is close to the lower limit of human
hearing, and adding 1 unit to the decibel measurement corresponds
to multiplying the energy level (or actually the power per unit area)
by a certain factor.
28 Chapter 2 Resonance
b / Friction has the effect of
pinching the x − t graph of a
vibrating object.
2.2 Energy Lost From Vibrations
Until now, we have been making the relatively unrealistic as
sumption that a vibration would never die out. For a realistic mass
on a spring, there will be friction, and the kinetic and potential
energy of the vibrations will therefore be gradually converted into
heat. Similarly, a guitar string will slowly convert its kinetic and
potential energy into sound. In all cases, the eﬀect is to “pinch” the
sinusoidal x − t graph more and more with passing time. Friction
is not necessarily bad in this context — a musical instrument that
never got rid of any of its energy would be completely silent! The
dissipation of the energy in a vibration is known as damping.
selfcheck A
Most people who try to draw graphs like those shown on the left will
tend to shrink their wiggles horizontally as well as vertically. Why is this
wrong? Answer, p. 100
In the graphs in ﬁgure b, I have not shown any point at which
the damped vibration ﬁnally stops completely. Is this realistic? Yes
and no. If energy is being lost due to friction between two solid
surfaces, then we expect the force of friction to be nearly indepen
dent of velocity. This constant friction force puts an upper limit on
the total distance that the vibrating object can ever travel without
replenishing its energy, since work equals force times distance, and
the object must stop doing work when its energy is all converted
into heat. (The friction force does reverse directions when the ob
ject turns around, but reversing the direction of the motion at the
same time that we reverse the direction of the force makes it certain
that the object is always doing positive work, not negative work.)
Damping due to a constant friction force is not the only possi
bility however, or even the most common one. A pendulum may
be damped mainly by air friction, which is approximately propor
tional to v
2
, while other systems may exhibit friction forces that
are proportional to v. It turns out that friction proportional to v
is the simplest case to analyze mathematically, and anyhow all the
important physical insights can be gained by studying this case.
If the friction force is proportional to v, then as the vibrations
die down, the frictional forces get weaker due to the lower speeds.
The less energy is left in the system, the more miserly the system
becomes with giving away any more energy. Under these conditions,
the vibrations theoretically never die out completely, and mathemat
ically, the loss of energy from the system is exponential: the system
loses a ﬁxed percentage of its energy per cycle. This is referred to
as exponential decay.
A nonrigorous proof is as follows. The force of friction is pro
portional to v, and v is proportional to how far the objects travels in
one cycle, so the frictional force is proportional to amplitude. The
Section 2.2 Energy Lost From Vibrations 29
c / The amplitude is halved
with each cycle.
amount of work done by friction is proportional to the force and to
the distance traveled, so the work done in one cycle is proportional
to the square of the amplitude. Since both the work and the energy
are proportional to A
2
, the amount of energy taken away by friction
in one cycle is a ﬁxed percentage of the amount of energy the system
has.
selfcheck B
Figure c shows an xt graph for a strongly damped vibration, which loses
half of its amplitude with every cycle. What fraction of the energy is lost
in each cycle? Answer, p. 100
It is customary to describe the amount of damping with a quan
tity called the quality factor, Q, deﬁned as the number of cycles
required for the energy to fall oﬀ by a factor of 535. (The origin
of this obscure numerical factor is e
2π
, where e = 2.71828 . . . is the
base of natural logarithms. Choosing this particular number causes
some of our later equations to come out nice and simple.) The ter
minology arises from the fact that friction is often considered a bad
thing, so a mechanical device that can vibrate for many oscillations
before it loses a signiﬁcant fraction of its energy would be considered
a highquality device.
Exponential decay in a trumpet example 3
The vibrations of the air column inside a trumpet have a Q of about
10. This means that even after the trumpet player stops blowing, the
note will keep sounding for a short time. If the player suddenly stops
blowing, how will the sound intensity 20 cycles later compare with the
sound intensity while she was still blowing?
The trumpet’s Q is 10, so after 10 cycles the energy will have fallen off
by a factor of 535. After another 10 cycles we lose another factor of 535,
so the sound intensity is reduced by a factor of 535×535 = 2.9×10
5
.
The decay of a musical sound is part of what gives it its charac
ter, and a good musical instrument should have the right Q, but the
Q that is considered desirable is diﬀerent for diﬀerent instruments.
A guitar is meant to keep on sounding for a long time after a string
has been plucked, and might have a Q of 1000 or 10000. One of the
reasons why a cheap synthesizer sounds so bad is that the sound
suddenly cuts oﬀ after a key is released.
Q of a stereo speaker example 4
Stereo speakers are not supposed to reverberate or “ring” after an elec
trical signal that stops suddenly. After all, the recorded music was made
by musicians who knew how to shape the decays of their notes cor
rectly. Adding a longer “tail” on every note would make it sound wrong.
We therefore expect that stereo speaker will have a very low Q, and
indeed, most speakers are designed with a Q of about 1. (Lowquality
speakers with larger Q values are referred to as “boomy.”)
We will see later in the chapter that there are other reasons why
a speaker should not have a high Q.
30 Chapter 2 Resonance
e / The amplitude approaches a
maximum.
d / 1. Pushing a child on a
swing gradually puts more and
more energy into her vibrations.
2. A fairly realistic graph of the
driving force acting on the child.
3. A less realistic, but more
mathematically simple, driving
force.
2.3 Putting Energy Into Vibrations
When pushing a child on a swing, you cannot just apply a con
stant force. A constant force will move the swing out to a certain
angle, but will not allow the swing to start swinging. Nor can you
give short pushes at randomly chosen times. That type of ran
dom pushing would increase the child’s kinetic energy whenever you
happened to be pushing in the same direction as her motion, but it
would reduce her energy when your pushing happened to be in the
opposite direction compared to her motion. To make her build up
her energy, you need to make your pushes rhythmic, pushing at the
same point in each cycle. In other words, your force needs to form a
repeating pattern with the same frequency as the normal frequency
of vibration of the swing. Graph d/1 shows what the child’s x − t
graph would look like as you gradually put more and more energy
into her vibrations. A graph of your force versus time would prob
ably look something like graph 2. It turns out, however, that it is
much simpler mathematically to consider a vibration with energy
being pumped into it by a driving force that is itself a sinewave, 3.
A good example of this is your eardrum being driven by the force
of a sound wave.
Now we know realistically that the child on the swing will not
keep increasing her energy forever, nor does your eardrum end up
exploding because a continuing sound wave keeps pumping more and
more energy into it. In any realistic system, there is energy going
out as well as in. As the vibrations increase in amplitude, there is an
increase in the amount of energy taken away by damping with each
cycle. This occurs for two reasons. Work equals force times distance
(or, more accurately, the area under the forcedistance curve). As
the amplitude of the vibrations increases, the damping force is being
applied over a longer distance. Furthermore, the damping force
usually increases with velocity (we usually assume for simplicity
that it is proportional to velocity), and this also serves to increase
the rate at which damping forces remove energy as the amplitude
increases. Eventually (and small children and our eardrums are
thankful for this!), the amplitude approaches a maximum value, e,
at which energy is removed by the damping force just as quickly as
it is being put in by the driving force.
This process of approaching a maximum amplitude happens ex
tremely quickly in many cases, e.g., the ear or a radio receiver, and
we don’t even notice that it took a millisecond or a microsecond
for the vibrations to “build up steam.” We are therefore mainly
interested in predicting the behavior of the system once it has had
enough time to reach essentially its maximum amplitude. This is
known as the steadystate behavior of a vibrating system.
Now comes the interesting part: what happens if the frequency
of the driving force is mismatched to the frequency at which the
system would naturally vibrate on its own? We all know that a
Section 2.3 Putting Energy Into Vibrations 31
radio station doesn’t have to be tuned in exactly, although there is
only a small range over which a given station can be received. The
designers of the radio had to make the range fairly small to make
it possible eliminate unwanted stations that happened to be nearby
in frequency, but it couldn’t be too small or you wouldn’t be able
to adjust the knob accurately enough. (Even a digital radio can
be tuned to 88.0 MHz and still bring in a station at 88.1 MHz.)
The ear also has some natural frequency of vibration, but in this
case the range of frequencies to which it can respond is quite broad.
Evolution has made the ear’s frequency response as broad as pos
sible because it was to our ancestors’ advantage to be able to hear
everything from a low roars to a highpitched shriek.
The remainder of this section develops four important facts about
the response of a system to a driving force whose frequency is not
necessarily the same as the system’s natural frequency of vibration.
The style is approximate and intuitive, but proofs are given in the
subsequent optional section.
First, although we know the ear has a frequency — about 4000
Hz — at which it would vibrate naturally, it does not vibrate at
4000 Hz in response to a lowpitched 200 Hz tone. It always re
sponds at the frequency at which it is driven. Otherwise all pitches
would sound like 4000 Hz to us. This is a general fact about driven
vibrations:
(1) The steadystate response to a sinusoidal driving force occurs at
the frequency of the force, not at the system’s own natural frequency
of vibration.
Now let’s think about the amplitude of the steadystate response.
Imagine that a child on a swing has a natural frequency of vibration
of 1 Hz, but we are going to try to make her swing back and forth at
3 Hz. We intuitively realize that quite a large force would be needed
to achieve an amplitude of even 30 cm, i.e., the amplitude is less in
proportion to the force. When we push at the natural frequency of
1 Hz, we are essentially just pumping energy back into the system
to compensate for the loss of energy due to the damping (friction)
force. At 3 Hz, however, we are not just counteracting friction. We
are also providing an extra force to make the child’s momentum
reverse itself more rapidly than it would if gravity and the tension
in the chain were the only forces acting. It is as if we are artiﬁcially
increasing the k of the swing, but this is wasted eﬀort because we
spend just as much time decelerating the child (taking energy out
of the system) as accelerating her (putting energy in).
Now imagine the case in which we drive the child at a very
low frequency, say 0.02 Hz or about one vibration per minute. We
are essentially just holding the child in position while very slowly
walking back and forth. Again we intuitively recognize that the
32 Chapter 2 Resonance
f / The collapsed section of
the Nimitz Freeway.
amplitude will be very small in proportion to our driving force.
Imagine how hard it would be to hold the child at our own head
level when she is at the end of her swing! As in the toofast 3 Hz
case, we are spending most of our eﬀort in artiﬁcially changing the
k of the swing, but now rather than reinforcing the gravity and
tension forces we are working against them, eﬀectively reducing k.
Only a very small part of our force goes into counteracting friction,
and the rest is used in repetitively putting potential energy in on
the upswing and taking it back out on the downswing, without any
longterm gain.
We can now generalize to make the following statement, which
is true for all driven vibrations:
(2) A vibrating system resonates at its own natural frequency. That
is, the amplitude of the steadystate response is greatest in propor
tion to the amount of driving force when the driving force matches
the natural frequency of vibration.
An opera singer breaking a wine glass example 5
In order to break a wineglass by singing, an opera singer must ﬁrst tap
the glass to ﬁnd its natural frequency of vibration, and then sing the
same note back.
Collapse of the Nimitz Freeway in an earthquake example 6
I led off the chapter with the dramatic collapse of the Tacoma Narrows
Bridge, mainly because a it was well documented by a local physics
professor, and an unknown person made a movie of the collapse. The
collapse of a section of the Nimitz Freeway in Oakland, CA, during a
1989 earthquake is however a simpler example to analyze.
An earthquake consists of many lowfrequency vibrations that occur si
multaneously, which is why it sounds like a rumble of indeterminate pitch
rather than a low hum. The frequencies that we can hear are not even
the strongest ones; most of the energy is in the form of vibrations in the
range of frequencies from about 1 Hz to 10 Hz.
Now all the structures we build are resting on geological layers of dirt,
mud, sand, or rock. When an earthquake wave comes along, the top
most layer acts like a system with a certain natural frequency of vibra
tion, sort of like a cube of jello on a plate being shaken from side to side.
The resonant frequency of the layer depends on how stiff it is and also
on how deep it is. The illfated section of the Nimitz freeway was built on
a layer of mud, and analysis by geologist Susan E. Hough of the U.S.
Geological Survey shows that the mud layer’s resonance was centered
on about 2.5 Hz, and had a width covering a range from about 1 Hz to
4 Hz.
When the earthquake wave came along with its mixture of frequencies,
the mud responded strongly to those that were close to its own natu
ral 2.5 Hz frequency. Unfortunately, an engineering analysis after the
quake showed that the overpass itself had a resonant frequency of 2.5
Hz as well! The mud responded strongly to the earthquake waves with
frequencies close to 2.5 Hz, and the bridge responded strongly to the
2.5 Hz vibrations of the mud, causing sections of it to collapse.
Section 2.3 Putting Energy Into Vibrations 33
Collapse of the Tacoma Narrows Bridge example 7
Let’s now examine the more conceptually difﬁcult case of the Tacoma
Narrows Bridge. The surprise here is that the wind was steady. If the
wind was blowing at constant velocity, why did it shake the bridge back
and forth? The answer is a little complicated. Based on ﬁlm footage
and afterthefact wind tunnel experiments, it appears that two different
mechanisms were involved.
The ﬁrst mechanism was the one responsible for the initial, relatively
weak vibrations, and it involved resonance. As the wind moved over the
bridge, it began acting like a kite or an airplane wing. As shown in the
ﬁgure, it established swirling patterns of air ﬂow around itself, of the kind
that you can see in a moving cloud of smoke. As one of these swirls
moved off of the bridge, there was an abrupt change in air pressure,
which resulted in an up or down force on the bridge. We see something
similar when a ﬂag ﬂaps in the wind, except that the ﬂag’s surface is
usually vertical. This backandforth sequence of forces is exactly the
kind of periodic driving force that would excite a resonance. The faster
the wind, the more quickly the swirls would get across the bridge, and
the higher the frequency of the driving force would be. At just the right
velocity, the frequency would be the right one to excite the resonance.
The windtunnel models, however, show that the pattern of vibration of
the bridge excited by this mechanism would have been a different one
than the one that ﬁnally destroyed the bridge.
The bridge was probably destroyed by a different mechanism, in which
its vibrations at its own natural frequency of 0.2 Hz set up an alternating
pattern of wind gusts in the air immediately around it, which then in
creased the amplitude of the bridge’s vibrations. This vicious cycle fed
upon itself, increasing the amplitude of the vibrations until the bridge
ﬁnally collapsed.
As long as we’re on the subject of collapsing bridges, it is worth
bringing up the reports of bridges falling down when soldiers march
ing over them happened to step in rhythm with the bridge’s natural
frequency of oscillation. This is supposed to have happened in 1831
in Manchester, England, and again in 1849 in Anjou, France. Many
modern engineers and scientists, however, are suspicious of the anal
ysis of these reports. It is possible that the collapses had more to do
with poor construction and overloading than with resonance. The
Nimitz Freeway and Tacoma Narrows Bridge are far better docu
mented, and occurred in an era when engineers’ abilities to analyze
the vibrations of a complex structure were much more advanced.
Emission and absorption of light waves by atoms example 8
In a very thin gas, the atoms are sufﬁciently far apart that they can act
as individual vibrating systems. Although the vibrations are of a very
strange and abstract type described by the theory of quantum mechan
ics, they nevertheless obey the same basic rules as ordinary mechan
ical vibrations. When a thin gas made of a certain element is heated,
it emits light waves with certain speciﬁc frequencies, which are like a
ﬁngerprint of that element. As with all other vibrations, these atomic vi
brations respond most strongly to a driving force that matches their own
natural frequency. Thus if we have a relatively cold gas with light waves
of various frequencies passing through it, the gas will absorb light at
34 Chapter 2 Resonance
g / The deﬁnition of the full
width at half maximum.
precisely those frequencies at which it would emit light if heated.
(3) When a system is driven at resonance, the steadystate vibra
tions have an amplitude that is proportional to Q.
This is fairly intuitive. The steadystate behavior is an equilib
rium between energy input from the driving force and energy loss
due to damping. A lowQ oscillator, i.e., one with strong damping,
dumps its energy faster, resulting in loweramplitude steadystate
motion.
selfcheck C
If an opera singer is shopping for a wine glass that she can impress her
friends by breaking, what should she look for? Answer, p. 100
Piano strings ringing in sympathy with a sung note example 9
A sufﬁciently loud musical note sung near a piano with the lid raised
can cause the corresponding strings in the piano to vibrate. (A piano
has a set of three strings for each note, all struck by the same hammer.)
Why would this trick be unlikely to work with a violin?
If you have heard the sound of a violin being plucked (the pizzicato
effect), you know that the note dies away very quickly. In other words, a
violin’s Q is much lower than a piano’s. This means that its resonances
are much weaker in amplitude.
Our fourth and ﬁnal fact about resonance is perhaps the most
surprising. It gives us a way to determine numerically how wide
a range of driving frequencies will produce a strong response. As
shown in the graph, resonances do not suddenly fall oﬀ to zero out
side a certain frequency range. It is usual to describe the width of a
resonance by its full width at halfmaximum (FWHM) as illustrated
in ﬁgure g.
(4) The FWHM of a resonance is related to its Q and its resonant
frequency f
res
by the equation
FWHM =
f
res
Q
.
(This equation is only a good approximation when Q is large.)
Why? It is not immediately obvious that there should be any
logical relationship between Q and the FWHM. Here’s the idea. As
we have seen already, the reason why the response of an oscillator
is smaller away from resonance is that much of the driving force is
being used to make the system act as if it had a diﬀerent k. Roughly
speaking, the halfmaximum points on the graph correspond to the
places where the amount of the driving force being wasted in this
way is the same as the amount of driving force being used pro
ductively to replace the energy being dumped out by the damping
force. If the damping force is strong, then a large amount of force
Section 2.3 Putting Energy Into Vibrations 35
is needed to counteract it, and we can waste quite a bit of driving
force on changing k before it becomes comparable to the damping
force. If, on the other hand, the damping force is weak, then even a
small amount of force being wasted on changing k will become sig
niﬁcant in proportion, and we cannot get very far from the resonant
frequency before the two are comparable.
Changing the pitch of a wind instrument example 10
A saxophone player normally selects which note to play by choos
ing a certain ﬁngering, which gives the saxophone a certain resonant
frequency. The musician can also, however, change the pitch signiﬁ
cantly by altering the tightness of her lips. This corresponds to driving
the horn slightly off of resonance. If the pitch can be altered by about
5% up or down (about one musical halfstep) without too much effort,
roughly what is the Q of a saxophone?
Five percent is the width on one side of the resonance, so the full
width is about 10%, FWHM / f
r es
= 0.1. This implies a Q of about 10,
i.e., once the musician stops blowing, the horn will continue sounding
for about 10 cycles before its energy falls off by a factor of 535. (Blues
and jazz saxophone players will typically choose a mouthpiece that has
a low Q, so that they can produce the bluesy pitchslides typical of their
style. “Legit,” i.e., classically oriented players, use a higherQ setup
because their style only calls for enough pitch variation to produce a
vibrato.)
Decay of a saxophone tone example 11
If a typical saxophone setup has a Q of about 10, how long will it take
for a 100Hz tone played on a baritone saxophone to die down by a
factor of 535 in energy, after the player suddenly stops blowing?
A Q of 10 means that it takes 10 cycles for the vibrations to die down
in energy by a factor of 535. Ten cycles at a frequency of 100 Hz would
correspond to a time of 0.1 seconds, which is not very long. This is
why a saxophone note doesn’t “ring” like a note played on a piano or an
electric guitar.
Q of a radio receiver example 12
A radio receiver used in the FM band needs to be tuned in to within
about 0.1 MHz for signals at about 100 MHz. What is its Q?
Q = f
r es
/FWHM = 1000. This is an extremely high Q compared to
most mechanical systems.
Q of a stereo speaker example 13
We have already given one reason why a stereo speaker should have a
low Q: otherwise it would continue ringing after the end of the musical
note on the recording. The second reason is that we want it to be able
to respond to a large range of frequencies.
36 Chapter 2 Resonance
h / Example 14. 1. A com
pass needle vibrates about the
equilibrium position under the
inﬂuence of the earth’s magnetic
forces. 2. The orientation of a
proton’s spin vibrates around its
equilibrium direction under the
inﬂuence of the magnetic forces
coming from the surrounding
electrons and nuclei.
i / A member of the author’s
family, who turned out to be
healthy.
j / A threedimensional com
puter reconstruction of the shape
of a human brain, based on
magnetic resonance data.
Nuclear magnetic resonance example 14
If you have ever played with a magnetic compass, you have undoubtedly
noticed that if you shake it, it takes some time to settle down, h/1. As it
settles down, it acts like a damped oscillator of the type we have been
discussing. The compass needle is simply a small magnet, and the
planet earth is a big magnet. The magnetic forces between them tend
to bring the needle to an equilibrium position in which it lines up with the
planetearthmagnet.
Essentially the same physics lies behind the technique called Nuclear
Magnetic Resonance (NMR). NMR is a technique used to deduce the
molecular structure of unknown chemical substances, and it is also
used for making medical images of the inside of people’s bodies. If
you ever have an NMR scan, they will actually tell you you are undergo
ing “magnetic resonance imaging” or “MRI,” because people are scared
of the word “nuclear.” In fact, the nuclei being referred to are simply the
nonradioactive nuclei of atoms found naturally in your body.
Here’s how NMR works. Your body contains large numbers of hydrogen
atoms, each consisting of a small, lightweight electron orbiting around a
large, heavy proton. That is, the nucleus of a hydrogen atom is just one
proton. A proton is always spinning on its own axis, and the combination
of its spin and its electrical charge cause it to behave like a tiny magnet.
The principle identical to that of an electromagnet, which consists of a
coil of wire through which electrical charges pass; the circling motion of
the charges in the coil of wire makes it magnetic, and in the same way,
the circling motion of the proton’s charge makes it magnetic.
Now a proton in one of your body’s hydrogen atoms ﬁnds itself sur
rounded by many other whirling, electrically charged particles: its own
electron, plus the electrons and nuclei of the other nearby atoms. These
neighbors act like magnets, and exert magnetic forces on the proton,
h/2. The k of the vibrating proton is simply a measure of the total
strength of these magnetic forces. Depending on the structure of the
molecule in which the hydrogen atom ﬁnds itself, there will be a partic
ular set of magnetic forces acting on the proton and a particular value
of k. The NMR apparatus bombards the sample with radio waves, and
if the frequency of the radio waves matches the resonant frequency of
the proton, the proton will absorb radiowave energy strongly and oscil
late wildly. Its vibrations are damped not by friction, because there is no
friction inside an atom, but by the reemission of radio waves.
By working backward through this chain of reasoning, one can deter
mine the geometric arrangement of the hydrogen atom’s neighboring
atoms. It is also possible to locate atoms in space, allowing medical
images to be made.
Finally, it should be noted that the behavior of the proton cannot be de
scribed entirely correctly by Newtonian physics. Its vibrations are of the
strange and spooky kind described by the laws of quantum mechanics.
It is impressive, however, that the few simple ideas we have learned
about resonance can still be applied successfully to describe many as
pects of this exotic system.
Section 2.3 Putting Energy Into Vibrations 37
Discussion Question
A Nikola Tesla, one of the inventors of radio and an archetypical mad
scientist, told a credulous reporter the following story about an applica
tion of resonance. He built an electric vibrator that ﬁt in his pocket, and
attached it to one of the steel beams of a building that was under construc
tion in New York. Although the article in which he was quoted didn’t say
so, he presumably claimed to have tuned it to the resonant frequency of
the building. “In a few minutes, I could feel the beam trembling. Gradually
the trembling increased in intensity and extended throughout the whole
great mass of steel. Finally, the structure began to creak and weave, and
the steelworkers came to the ground panicstricken, believing that there
had been an earthquake. ... [If] I had kept on ten minutes more, I could
have laid that building ﬂat in the street.” Is this physically plausible?
38 Chapter 2 Resonance
k / Driving at a frequency above
resonance.
l / Driving at resonance.
m / Driving at a frequency
below resonance.
2.4 Proofs
Our ﬁrst goal is to predict the amplitude of the steadystate
vibrations as a function of the frequency of the driving force and
the amplitude of the driving force. With that equation in hand, we
will then prove statements 2, 3, and 4 from the previous section.
We assume without proof statement 1, that the steadystate motion
occurs at the same frequency as the driving force.
As with the proof in chapter 1, we make use of the fact that
a sinusoidal vibration is the same as the projection of circular mo
tion onto a line. We visualize the system shown in ﬁgures km,
in which the mass swings in a circle on the end of a spring. The
spring does not actually change its length at all, but it appears to
from the ﬂattened perspective of a person viewing the system edge
on. The radius of the circle is the amplitude, A, of the vibrations
as seen edgeon. The damping force can be imagined as a back
ward drag force supplied by some ﬂuid through which the mass is
moving. As usual, we assume that the damping is proportional to
velocity, and we use the symbol b for the proportionality constant,
F
d
 = bv. The driving force, represented by a hand towing the mass
with a string, has a tangential component F
t
 which counteracts the
damping force, F
t
 = F
d
, and a radial component F
r
which works
either with or against the spring’s force, depending on whether we
are driving the system above or below its resonant frequency.
The speed of the rotating mass is the circumference of the circle
divided by the period, v = 2πA/T, its acceleration (which is directly
inward) is a = v
2
/r, and Newton’s second law gives a = F/m =
(kA+F
r
)/m. We write f
res
for
1
2π
_
k/m. Straightforward algebra
yields
[1]
F
r
F
t
=
2πm
bf
_
f
2
−f
2
res
_
.
This is the ratio of the wasted force to the useful force, and we see
that it becomes zero when the system is driven at resonance.
The amplitude of the vibrations can be found by attacking the
equation F
t
 = bv = 2πbAf, which gives
[2] A =
F
t

2πbf
.(2)
However, we wish to know the amplitude in terms of —F—, not
F
t
. From now on, let’s drop the cumbersome magnitude symbols.
With the Pythagorean theorem, it is easily proven that
[3] F
t
=
F
_
1 +
_
Fr
Ft
_
2
, (3)
and equations 13 can then be combined to give the ﬁnal result
[4] A =
F
2π
_
4π
2
m
2
(f
2
−f
2
res
)
2
+b
2
f
2
.
Section 2.4 Proofs 39
Statement 2: maximum amplitude at resonance
Equation 4 shows directly that the amplitude is maximized when
the system is driven at its resonant frequency. At resonance, the ﬁrst
term inside the square root vanishes, and this makes the denomi
nator as small as possible, causing the amplitude to be as big as
possible. (Actually this is only approximately true, because it is
possible to make A a little bigger by decreasing f a little below
f
res
, which makes the second term smaller. This technical issue is
addressed in homework problem 3 on page 43.)
Statement 3: amplitude at resonance proportional to Q
Equation 4 shows that the amplitude at resonance is propor
tional to 1/b, and the Q of the system is inversely proportional to
b, so the amplitude at resonance is proportional to Q.
Statement 4: FWHM related to Q
We will satisfy ourselves by proving only the proportionality
FWHM ∝ f
res
/Q, not the actual equation FWHM = f
res
/Q.
The energy is proportional to A
2
, i.e., to the inverse of the quantity
inside the square root in equation 4. At resonance, the ﬁrst term
inside the square root vanishes, and the halfmaximum points occur
at frequencies for which the whole quantity inside the square root
is double its value at resonance, i.e., when the two terms are equal.
At the halfmaximum points, we have
f
2
−f
2
res
=
_
f
res
±
FWHM
2
_
2
−f
2
res
= ±f
res
· FWHM +
1
4
FWHM
2
If we assume that the width of the resonance is small compared to
the resonant frequency, then the FWHM
2
term is negligible com
pared to the f
res
· FWHM term, and setting the terms in equation
4 equal to each other gives
4π
2
m
2
(f
res
FWHM)
2
= b
2
f
2
.
We are assuming that the width of the resonance is small compared
to the resonant frequency, so f and f
res
can be taken as synonyms.
Thus,
FWHM =
b
2πm
.
We wish to connect this to Q, which can be interpreted as the en
ergy of the free (undriven) vibrations divided by the work done by
damping in one cycle. The former equals kA
2
/2, and the latter is
proportional to the force, bv ∝ bAf
res
, multiplied by the distance
traveled, A. (This is only a proportionality, not an equation, since
the force is not constant.) We therefore ﬁnd that Q is proportional
to k/bf
res
. The equation for the FWHM can then be restated as a
proportionality FWHM ∝ k/Qf
res
m ∝ f
res
/Q.
40 Chapter 2 Resonance
Summary
Selected Vocabulary
damping . . . . . the dissipation of a vibration’s energy into
heat energy, or the frictional force that causes
the loss of energy
quality factor . . the number of oscillations required for a sys
tem’s energy to fall oﬀ by a factor of 535 due
to damping
driving force . . . an external force that pumps energy into a vi
brating system
resonance . . . . the tendency of a vibrating system to respond
most strongly to a driving force whose fre
quency is close to its own natural frequency
of vibration
steady state . . . the behavior of a vibrating system after it has
had plenty of time to settle into a steady re
sponse to a driving force
Notation
Q . . . . . . . . . the quality factor
f
res
. . . . . . . . the natural (resonant) frequency of a vibrating
system, i.e., the frequency at which it would
vibrate if it was simply kicked and left alone
f . . . . . . . . . . the frequency at which the system actually vi
brates, which in the case of a driven system is
equal to the frequency of the driving force, not
the natural frequency
Summary
The energy of a vibration is always proportional to the square of
the amplitude, assuming the amplitude is small. Energy is lost from
a vibrating system for various reasons such as the conversion to heat
via friction or the emission of sound. This eﬀect, called damping,
will cause the vibrations to decay exponentially unless energy is
pumped into the system to replace the loss. A driving force that
pumps energy into the system may drive the system at its own
natural frequency or at some other frequency. When a vibrating
system is driven by an external force, we are usually interested in
its steadystate behavior, i.e., its behavior after it has had time to
settle into a steady response to a driving force. In the steady state,
the same amount of energy is pumped into the system during each
cycle as is lost to damping during the same period.
The following are four important facts about a vibrating system
being driven by an external force:
(1) The steadystate response to a sinusoidal driving force oc
curs at the frequency of the force, not at the system’s own natural
frequency of vibration.
Summary 41
(2) A vibrating system resonates at its own natural frequency.
That is, the amplitude of the steadystate response is greatest in
proportion to the amount of driving force when the driving force
matches the natural frequency of vibration.
(3) When a system is driven at resonance, the steadystate vi
brations have an amplitude that is proportional to Q.
(4) The FWHM of a resonance is related to its Q and its resonant
frequency f
res
by the equation
FWHM =
f
res
Q
.
(This equation is only a good approximation when Q is large.)
42 Chapter 2 Resonance
Problems
Key
√
A computerized answer check is available online.
_
A problem that requires calculus.
A diﬃcult problem.
1 If one stereo system is capable of producing 20 watts of sound
power and another can put out 50 watts, how many times greater
is the amplitude of the sound wave that can be created by the more
powerful system? (Assume they are playing the same music.)
2 Many ﬁsh have an organ known as a swim bladder, an airﬁlled
cavity whose main purpose is to control the ﬁsh’s buoyancy an allow
it to keep from rising or sinking without having to use its muscles.
In some ﬁsh, however, the swim bladder (or a small extension of it)
is linked to the ear and serves the additional purpose of amplifying
sound waves. For a typical ﬁsh having such an anatomy, the bladder
has a resonant frequency of 300 Hz, the bladder’s Q is 3, and the
maximum ampliﬁcation is about a factor of 100 in energy. Over what
range of frequencies would the ampliﬁcation be at least a factor of
50?
3 As noted in section 2.4, it is only approximately true that the
amplitude has its maximum at f = (1/2π)
_
k/m. Being more care
ful, we should actually deﬁne two diﬀerent symbols, f
0
= (1/2π)
_
k/m
and f
res
for the slightly diﬀerent frequency at which the amplitude
is a maximum, i.e., the actual resonant frequency. In this notation,
the amplitude as a function of frequency is
A =
F
2π
_
4π
2
m
2
_
f
2
−f
2
0
_
2
+b
2
f
2
.
Show that the maximum occurs not at f
o
but rather at the frequency
f
res
=
_
f
2
0
−
b
2
8π
2
m
2
=
_
f
2
0
−
1
2
FWHM
2
Hint: Finding the frequency that minimizes the quantity inside the
square root is equivalent to, but much easier than, ﬁnding the fre
quency that maximizes the amplitude.
_
4 (a) Let W be the amount of work done by friction in the ﬁrst
cycle of oscillation, i.e., the amount of energy lost to heat. Find
the fraction of the original energy E that remains in the oscillations
after n cycles of motion.
(b) From this prove the equation (recalling that the number 535 in
the deﬁnition of Q is e
2π
).
(c) Use this to prove the approximation 1/Q ≈ (1/2π)W/E. (Hint:
Use the approximation ln(1 +x) ≈ x, which is valid for small values
of x.)
Problems 43
Problem 6.
5 The goal of this problem is to reﬁne the proportionality FWHM ∝
f
res
/Q into the equation FWHM = f
res
/Q, i.e., to prove that the
constant of proportionality equals 1.
(a) Show that the work done by a damping force F = −bv over one
cycle of steadystate motion equals W
damp
= −2π
2
bfA
2
. Hint: It
is less confusing to calculate the work done over half a cycle, from
x = −A to x = +A, and then double it.
(b) Show that the fraction of the undriven oscillator’s energy lost to
damping over one cycle is W
damp
/E = 4π
2
bf/k.
(c) Use the previous result, combined with the result of problem 4,
to prove that Q equals k/2πbf .
(d) Combine the preceding result for Q with the equation FWHM =
b/2πm from section 2.4 to prove the equation FWHM = f
res
/Q.
_
6 The ﬁgure is from Shape memory in Spider draglines, Emile,
Le Floch, and Vollrath, Nature 440:621 (2006). Panel 1 shows an
electron microscope’s image of a thread of spider silk. In 2, a spi
der is hanging from such a thread. From an evolutionary point of
view, it’s probably a bad thing for the spider if it twists back and
forth while hanging like this. (We’re referring to a backandforth
rotation about the axis of the thread, not a swinging motion like a
pendulum.) The authors speculate that such a vibration could make
the spider easier for predators to see, and it also seems to me that
it would be a bad thing just because the spider wouldn’t be able
to control its orientation and do what it was trying to do. Panel 3
shows a graph of such an oscillation, which the authors measured
using a video camera and a computer, with a 0.1 g mass hung from it
in place of a spider. Compared to humanmade ﬁbers such as kevlar
or copper wire, the spider thread has an unusual set of properties:
1. It has a low Q, so the vibrations damp out quickly.
2. It doesn’t become brittle with repeated twisting as a copper
wire would.
3. When twisted, it tends to settle in to a new equilibrium angle,
rather than insisting on returning to its original angle. You
can see this in panel 2, because although the experimenters
initially twisted the wire by 33 degrees, the thread only per
formed oscillations with an amplitude much smaller than ±35
degrees, settling down to a new equilibrium at 27 degrees.
4. Over much longer time scales (hours), the thread eventually
resets itself to its original equilbrium angle (shown as zero
degrees on the graph). (The graph reproduced here only shows
the motion over a much shorter time scale.) Some human
made materials have this “memory” property as well, but they
44 Chapter 2 Resonance
typically need to be heated in order to make them go back to
their original shapes.
Focusing on property number 1, estimate the Q of spider silk from
the graph.
Problems 45
46 Chapter 2 Resonance
a / Dipping a ﬁnger in some
water, 1, causes a disturbance
that spreads outward, 2.
“The Great Wave Off Kanagawa,” by Katsushika Hokusai (17601849).
Chapter 3
Free Waves
Your vocal cords or a saxophone reed can vibrate, but being able
to vibrate wouldn’t be of much use unless the vibrations could be
transmitted to the listener’s ear by sound waves. What are waves
and why do they exist? Put your ﬁngertip in the middle of a cup
of water and then remove it suddenly. You will have noticed two
results that are surprising to most people. First, the ﬂat surface
of the water does not simply sink uniformly to ﬁll in the volume
vacated by your ﬁnger. Instead, ripples spread out, and the process
of ﬂattening out occurs over a long period of time, during which
the water at the center vibrates above and below the normal water
level. This type of wave motion is the topic of the present chapter.
Second, you have found that the ripples bounce oﬀ of the walls of
the cup, in much the same way that a ball would bounce oﬀ of a
wall. In the next chapter we discuss what happens to waves that
have a boundary around them. Until then, we conﬁne ourselves to
wave phenomena that can be analyzed as if the medium (e.g., the
water) was inﬁnite and the same everywhere.
It isn’t hard to understand why removing your ﬁngertip creates
ripples rather than simply allowing the water to sink back down
uniformly. The initial crater, (a), left behind by your ﬁnger has
sloping sides, and the water next to the crater ﬂows downhill to ﬁll
in the hole. The water far away, on the other hand, initially has
47
no way of knowing what has happened, because there is no slope
for it to ﬂow down. As the hole ﬁlls up, the rising water at the
center gains upward momentum, and overshoots, creating a little
hill where there had been a hole originally. The area just outside of
this region has been robbed of some of its water in order to build
the hill, so a depressed “moat” is formed, (b). This eﬀect cascades
outward, producing ripples.
48 Chapter 3 Free Waves
b / The two circular patterns of
ripples pass through each other.
Unlike material objects, wave pat
terns can overlap in space, and
when this happens they combine
by addition.
3.1 Wave Motion
There are three main ways in which wave motion diﬀers from the
motion of objects made of matter.
1. Superposition
The most profound diﬀerence is that waves do not display have
anything analogous to the normal forces between objects that come
in contact. Two wave patterns can therefore overlap in the same
region of space, as shown in ﬁgure b. Where the two waves coincide,
they add together. For instance, suppose that at a certain location
in at a certain moment in time, each wave would have had a crest
3 cm above the normal water level. The waves combine at this
point to make a 6cm crest. We use negative numbers to represent
depressions in the water. If both waves would have had a troughs
measuring 3 cm, then they combine to make an extradeep 6 cm
trough. A +3 cm crest and a 3 cm trough result in a height of zero,
i.e., the waves momentarily cancel each other out at that point.
This additive rule is referred to as the principle of superposition,
“superposition” being merely a fancy word for “adding.”
Superposition can occur not just with sinusoidal waves like the
ones in the ﬁgure above but with waves of any shape. The ﬁgures
on the following page show superposition of wave pulses. A pulse is
simply a wave of very short duration. These pulses consist only of
a single hump or trough. If you hit a clothesline sharply, you will
observe pulses heading oﬀ in both directions. This is analogous to
Section 3.1 Wave Motion 49
the way ripples spread out in all directions when you make a distur
bance at one point on water. The same occurs when the hammer
on a piano comes up and hits a string.
Experiments to date have not shown any deviation from the
principle of superposition in the case of light waves. For other types
of waves, it is typically a very good approximation for lowenergy
waves.
Discussion Question
A In ﬁgure c, the ﬁfth frame shows the spring just about perfectly
ﬂat. If the two pulses have essentially canceled each other out perfectly,
then why does the motion pick up again? Why doesn’t the spring just stay
ﬂat?
c / These pictures show the motion of wave pulses along a spring. To make a pulse, one end of the
spring was shaken by hand. Movies were ﬁlmed, and a series of frame chosen to show the motion. 1. A pulse
travels to the left. 2. Superposition of two colliding positive pulses. 3. Superposition of two colliding pulses, one
positive and one negative.
50 Chapter 3 Free Waves
e / As the wave pulse goes
by, the ribbon tied to the spring
is not carried along. The motion
of the wave pattern is to the
right, but the medium (spring) is
moving up and down, not to the
right.
d / As the wave pattern passes the rubber duck, the duck stays
put. The water isn’t moving forward with the wave.
2. The medium is not transported with the wave.
Figure d shows a series of water waves before it has reached a
rubber duck (left), having just passed the duck (middle) and having
progressed about a meter beyond the duck (right). The duck bobs
around its initial position, but is not carried along with the wave.
This shows that the water itself does not ﬂow outward with the
wave. If it did, we could empty one end of a swimming pool simply
by kicking up waves! We must distinguish between the motion of
the medium (water in this case) and the motion of the wave pattern
through the medium. The medium vibrates; the wave progresses
through space.
selfcheck A
In ﬁgure e, you can detect the sidetoside motion of the spring because
the spring appears blurry. At a certain instant, represented by a single
photo, how would you describe the motion of the different parts of the
spring? Other than the ﬂat parts, do any parts of the spring have zero
velocity? Answer, p. 100
A worm example 1
The worm in the ﬁgure is moving to the right. The wave pattern, a
pulse consisting of a compressed area of its body, moves to the left. In
other words, the motion of the wave pattern is in the opposite direction
compared to the motion of the medium.
Section 3.1 Wave Motion 51
f / Example 2. The surfer is
dragging his hand in the water.
g / Example 3: a breaking
wave.
h / Example 4. The boat has
run up against a limit on its speed
because it can’t climb over its
own wave. Dolphins get around
the problem by leaping out of the
water.
Surﬁng example 2
The incorrect belief that the medium moves with the wave is often rein
forced by garbled secondhand knowledge of surﬁng. Anyone who has
actually surfed knows that the front of the board pushes the water to the
sides, creating a wake — the surfer can even drag his hand through the
water, as in in ﬁgure f. If the water was moving along with the wave and
the surfer, this wouldn’t happen. The surfer is carried forward because
forward is downhill, not because of any forward ﬂow of the water. If the
water was ﬂowing forward, then a person ﬂoating in the water up to her
neck would be carried along just as quickly as someone on a surfboard.
In fact, it is even possible to surf down the back side of a wave, although
the ride wouldn’t last very long because the surfer and the wave would
quickly part company.
3. A wave’s velocity depends on the medium.
A material object can move with any velocity, and can be sped
up or slowed down by a force that increases or decreases its kinetic
energy. Not so with waves. The magnitude of a wave’s velocity
depends on the properties of the medium (and perhaps also on the
shape of the wave, for certain types of waves). Sound waves travel
at about 340 m/s in air, 1000 m/s in helium. If you kick up water
waves in a pool, you will ﬁnd that kicking harder makes waves that
are taller (and therefore carry more energy), not faster. The sound
waves from an exploding stick of dynamite carry a lot of energy, but
are no faster than any other waves. In the following section we will
give an example of the physical relationship between the wave speed
and the properties of the medium.
Breaking waves example 3
The velocity of water waves increases with depth. The crest of a wave
travels faster than the trough, and this can cause the wave to break.
Once a wave is created, the only reason its speed will change is
if it enters a diﬀerent medium or if the properties of the medium
change. It is not so surprising that a change in medium can slow
down a wave, but the reverse can also happen. A sound wave trav
eling through a helium balloon will slow down when it emerges into
the air, but if it enters another balloon it will speed back up again!
Similarly, water waves travel more quickly over deeper water, so a
wave will slow down as it passes over an underwater ridge, but speed
up again as it emerges into deeper water.
Hull speed example 4
The speeds of most boats, and of some surfaceswimming animals, are
limited by the fact that they make a wave due to their motion through the
water. The boat in ﬁgure h is going at the same speed as its own waves,
and can’t go any faster. No matter how hard the boat pushes against
the water, it can’t make the wave move ahead faster and get out of the
way. The wave’s speed depends only on the medium. Adding energy to
52 Chapter 3 Free Waves
i / Circular and linear wave
patterns.
j / Plane and spherical wave
patterns.
the wave doesn’t speed it up, it just increases its amplitude.
A water wave, unlike many other types of wave, has a speed that de
pends on its shape: a broader wave moves faster. The shape of the
wave made by a boat tends to mold itself to the shape of the boat’s hull,
so a boat with a longer hull makes a broader wave that moves faster.
The maximum speed of a boat whose speed is limited by this effect
is therefore closely related to the length of its hull, and the maximum
speed is called the hull speed. Sailboats designed for racing are not
just long and skinny to make them more streamlined — they are also
long so that their hull speeds will be high.
Wave patterns
If the magnitude of a wave’s velocity vector is preordained, what
about its direction? Waves spread out in all directions from every
point on the disturbance that created them. If the disturbance is
small, we may consider it as a single point, and in the case of water
waves the resulting wave pattern is the familiar circular ripple, i/1.
If, on the other hand, we lay a pole on the surface of the water
and wiggle it up and down, we create a linear wave pattern, i/2.
For a threedimensional wave such as a sound wave, the analogous
patterns would be spherical waves and plane waves, j.
Inﬁnitely many patterns are possible, but linear or plane waves
are often the simplest to analyze, because the velocity vector is in
the same direction no matter what part of the wave we look at. Since
all the velocity vectors are parallel to one another, the problem is
eﬀectively onedimensional. Throughout this chapter and the next,
we will restrict ourselves mainly to wave motion in one dimension,
while not hesitating to broaden our horizons when it can be done
without too much complication.
Discussion Questions
A [see above]
B Sketch two positive wave pulses on a string that are overlapping but
not right on top of each other, and draw their superposition. Do the same
for a positive pulse running into a negative pulse.
C A traveling wave pulse is moving to the right on a string. Sketch the
velocity vectors of the various parts of the string. Now do the same for a
pulse moving to the left.
D In a spherical sound wave spreading out from a point, how would
the energy of the wave fall off with distance?
Section 3.1 Wave Motion 53
k / Hitting a key on a piano
causes a hammer to come up
from underneath and hit a string
(actually a set of three strings).
The result is a pair of pulses
moving away from the point of
impact.
l / A string is struck with a
hammer, 1, and two pulses ﬂy off,
2.
m / A continuous string can
be modeled as a series of
discrete masses connected by
springs.
3.2 Waves on a String
So far you have learned some counterintuitive things about the be
havior of waves, but intuition can be trained. The ﬁrst half of this
section aims to build your intuition by investigating a simple, one
dimensional type of wave: a wave on a string. If you have ever
stretched a string between the bottoms of two openmouthed cans
to talk to a friend, you were putting this type of wave to work.
Stringed instruments are another good example. Although we usu
ally think of a piano wire simply as vibrating, the hammer actually
strikes it quickly and makes a dent in it, which then ripples out in
both directions. Since this chapter is about free waves, not bounded
ones, we pretend that our string is inﬁnitely long.
After the qualitative discussion, we will use simple approxima
tions to investigate the speed of a wave pulse on a string. This quick
and dirty treatment is then followed by a rigorous attack using the
methods of calculus, which may be skipped by the student who has
not studied calculus. How far you penetrate in this section is up to
you, and depends on your mathematical selfconﬁdence. If you skip
the later parts and proceed to the next section, you should never
theless be aware of the important result that the speed at which a
pulse moves does not depend on the size or shape of the pulse. This
is a fact that is true for many other types of waves.
Intuitive ideas
Consider a string that has been struck, l/1, resulting in the cre
ation of two wave pulses, 2, one traveling to the left and one to the
right. This is analogous to the way ripples spread out in all direc
tions from a splash in water, but on a onedimensional string, “all
directions” becomes “both directions.”
We can gain insight by modeling the string as a series of masses
connected by springs. (In the actual string the mass and the springi
ness are both contributed by the molecules themselves.) If we look
at various microscopic portions of the string, there will be some ar
eas that are ﬂat, m/1, some that are sloping but not curved, 2, and
some that are curved, 3 and 4. In example 1 it is clear that both the
forces on the central mass cancel out, so it will not accelerate. The
same is true of 2, however. Only in curved regions such as 3 and 4
is an acceleration produced. In these examples, the vector sum of
the two forces acting on the central mass is not zero. The impor
tant concept is that curvature makes force: the curved areas of a
wave tend to experience forces resulting in an acceleration toward
the mouth of the curve. Note, however, that an uncurved portion
of the string need not remain motionless. It may move at constant
velocity to either side.
54 Chapter 3 Free Waves
n / A triangular pulse spreads out.
Approximate treatment
We now carry out an approximate treatment of the speed at
which two pulses will spread out from an initial indentation on a
string. For simplicity, we imagine a hammer blow that creates a tri
angular dent, n/1. We will estimate the amount of time, t, required
until each of the pulses has traveled a distance equal to the width
of the pulse itself. The velocity of the pulses is then ±w/t.
As always, the velocity of a wave depends on the properties of
the medium, in this case the string. The properties of the string can
be summarized by two variables: the tension, T, and the mass per
unit length, µ (Greek letter mu).
If we consider the part of the string encompassed by the initial
dent as a single object, then this object has a mass of approxi
mately µw (mass/length × length = mass). (Here, and throughout
the derivation, we assume that h is much less than w, so that we can
ignore the fact that this segment of the string has a length slightly
greater than w.) Although the downward acceleration of this seg
ment of the string will be neither constant over time nor uniform
across the string, we will pretend that it is constant for the sake of
our simple estimate. Roughly speaking, the time interval between
n/1 and 2 is the amount of time required for the initial dent to accel
erate from rest and reach its normal, ﬂattened position. Of course
the tip of the triangle has a longer distance to travel than the edges,
but again we ignore the complications and simply assume that the
segment as a whole must travel a distance h. Indeed, it might seem
surprising that the triangle would so neatly spring back to a per
fectly ﬂat shape. It is an experimental fact that it does, but our
analysis is too crude to address such details.
The string is kinked, i.e., tightly curved, at the edges of the
triangle, so it is here that there will be large forces that do not
cancel out to zero. There are two forces acting on the triangular
hump, one of magnitude T acting down and to the right, and one
of the same magnitude acting down and to the left. If the angle
of the sloping sides is θ, then the total force on the segment equals
2T sin θ. Dividing the triangle into two right triangles, we see that
sin θ equals h divided by the length of one of the sloping sides. Since
h is much less than w, the length of the sloping side is essentially
the same as w/2, so we have sin θ = h/w, and F = 4Th/w. The
acceleration of the segment (actually the acceleration of its center
of mass) is
a = F/m
= 4Th/µw
2
.
The time required to move a distance h under constant acceleration
Section 3.2 Waves on a String 55
a is found by solving h =
1
2
at
2
to yield
t =
_
2h
a
= w
_
µ
2T
.
Our ﬁnal result for the velocity of the pulses is
v =
w
t
=
¸
2T
µ
.
The remarkable feature of this result is that the velocity of the
pulses does not depend at all on w or h, i.e., any triangular pulse
has the same speed. It is an experimental fact (and we will also
prove rigorously in the following subsection) that any pulse of any
kind, triangular or otherwise, travels along the string at the same
speed. Of course, after so many approximations we cannot expect
to have gotten all the numerical factors right. The correct result for
the velocity of the pulses is
v =
¸
T
µ
.
The importance of the above derivation lies in the insight it
brings —that all pulses move with the same speed — rather than in
the details of the numerical result. The reason for our toohigh value
for the velocity is not hard to guess. It comes from the assumption
that the acceleration was constant, when actually the total force on
the segment would diminish as it ﬂattened out.
Rigorous derivation using calculus (optional)
After expending considerable eﬀort for an approximate solution,
we now display the power of calculus with a rigorous and completely
general treatment that is nevertheless much shorter and easier. Let
the ﬂat position of the string deﬁne the x axis, so that y measures
how far a point on the string is from equilibrium. The motion of
the string is characterized by y(x, t), a function of two variables.
Knowing that the force on any small segment of string depends
on the curvature of the string in that area, and that the second
derivative is a measure of curvature, it is not surprising to ﬁnd that
the inﬁnitesimal force dF acting on an inﬁnitesimal segment dx is
given by
dF = T
d
2
y
dx
2
dx .
(This can be proved by vector addition of the two inﬁnitesimal forces
acting on either side.) The acceleration is then a = dF/dm, or,
56 Chapter 3 Free Waves
substituting dm = µdx,
d
2
y
dt
2
=
T
µ
d
2
y
dx
2
.
The second derivative with respect to time is related to the second
derivative with respect to position. This is no more than a fancy
mathematical statement of the intuitive fact developed above, that
the string accelerates so as to ﬂatten out its curves.
Before even bothering to look for solutions to this equation, we
note that it already proves the principle of superposition, because
the derivative of a sum is the sum of the derivatives. Therefore the
sum of any two solutions will also be a solution.
Based on experiment, we expect that this equation will be sat
isﬁed by any function y(x, t) that describes a pulse or wave pattern
moving to the left or right at the correct speed v. In general, such
a function will be of the form y = f(x −vt) or y = f(x +vt), where
f is any function of one variable. Because of the chain rule, each
derivative with respect to time brings out a factor of . Evaluating
the second derivatives on both sides of the equation gives
(±v)
2
f
=
T
µ
f
.
Squaring gets rid of the sign, and we ﬁnd that we have a valid
solution for any function f, provided that v is given by
v =
¸
T
µ
.
Section 3.2 Waves on a String 57
3.3 Sound and Light Waves
Sound waves
The phenomenon of sound is easily found to have all the char
acteristics we expect from a wave phenomenon:
• Sound waves obey superposition. Sounds do not knock other
sounds out of the way when they collide, and we can hear more
than one sound at once if they both reach our ear simultane
ously.
• The medium does not move with the sound. Even standing
in front of a titanic speaker playing earsplitting music, we do
not feel the slightest breeze.
• The velocity of sound depends on the medium. Sound travels
faster in helium than in air, and faster in water than in helium.
Putting more energy into the wave makes it more intense, not
faster. For example, you can easily detect an echo when you
clap your hands a short distance from a large, ﬂat wall, and
the delay of the echo is no shorter for a louder clap.
Although not all waves have a speed that is independent of the
shape of the wave, and this property therefore is irrelevant to our
collection of evidence that sound is a wave phenomenon, sound does
nevertheless have this property. For instance, the music in a large
concert hall or stadium may take on the order of a second to reach
someone seated in the nosebleed section, but we do not notice or
care, because the delay is the same for every sound. Bass, drums,
and vocals all head outward from the stage at 340 m/s, regardless
of their diﬀering wave shapes.
If sound has all the properties we expect from a wave, then what
type of wave is it? It must be a vibration of a physical medium such
as air, since the speed of sound is diﬀerent in diﬀerent media, such
as helium or water. Further evidence is that we don’t receive sound
signals that have come to our planet through outer space. The roars
and whooshes of Hollywood’s space ships are fun, but scientiﬁcally
wrong.
1
We can also tell that sound waves consist of compressions and
expansions, rather than sideways vibrations like the shimmying of a
1
Outer space is not a perfect vacuum, so it is possible for sounds waves to
travel through it. However, if we want to create a sound wave, we typically do
it by creating vibrations of a physical object, such as the sounding board of a
guitar, the reed of a saxophone, or a speaker cone. The lower the density of the
surrounding medium, the less eﬃciently the energy can be converted into sound
and carried away. An isolated tuning fork, left to vibrate in interstellar space,
would dissipate the energy of its vibration into internal heat at a rate many
orders of magnitude greater than the rate of sound emission into the nearly
perfect vacuum around it.
58 Chapter 3 Free Waves
snake. Only compressional vibrations would be able to cause your
eardrums to vibrate in and out. Even for a very loud sound, the
compression is extremely weak; the increase or decrease compared
to normal atmospheric pressure is no more than a part per million.
Our ears are apparently very sensitive receivers!
Light waves
Entirely similar observations lead us to believe that light is a
wave, although the concept of light as a wave had a long and tortu
ous history. It is interesting to note that Isaac Newton very inﬂuen
tially advocated a contrary idea about light. The belief that matter
was made of atoms was stylish at the time among radical thinkers
(although there was no experimental evidence for their existence),
and it seemed logical to Newton that light as well should be made of
tiny particles, which he called corpuscles (Latin for “small objects”).
Newton’s triumphs in the science of mechanics, i.e., the study of
matter, brought him such great prestige that nobody bothered to
question his incorrect theory of light for 150 years. One persua
sive proof that light is a wave is that according to Newton’s theory,
two intersecting beams of light should experience at least some dis
ruption because of collisions between their corpuscles. Even if the
corpuscles were extremely small, and collisions therefore very infre
quent, at least some dimming should have been measurable. In fact,
very delicate experiments have shown that there is no dimming.
The wave theory of light was entirely successful up until the 20th
century, when it was discovered that not all the phenomena of light
could be explained with a pure wave theory. It is now believed that
both light and matter are made out of tiny chunks which have both
wave and particle properties. For now, we will content ourselves
with the wave theory of light, which is capable of explaining a great
many things, from cameras to rainbows.
If light is a wave, what is waving? What is the medium that
wiggles when a light wave goes by? It isn’t air. A vacuum is impen
etrable to sound, but light from the stars travels happily through
zillions of miles of empty space. Light bulbs have no air inside them,
but that doesn’t prevent the light waves from leaving the ﬁlament.
For a long time, physicists assumed that there must be a mysterious
medium for light waves, and they called it the aether (not to be
confused with the chemical). Supposedly the aether existed every
where in space, and was immune to vacuum pumps. The details of
the story are more ﬁttingly reserved for later in this course, but the
end result was that a long series of experiments failed to detect any
evidence for the aether, and it is no longer believed to exist. Instead,
light can be explained as a wave pattern made up of electrical and
magnetic ﬁelds.
Section 3.3 Sound and Light Waves 59
q / A strip chart recorder.
o / A graph of pressure ver
sus time for a periodic sound
wave, the vowel “ah.”
p / A similar graph for a non
periodic wave, “sh.”
3.4 Periodic Waves
Period and frequency of a periodic wave
You choose a radio station by selecting a certain frequency. We
have already deﬁned period and frequency for vibrations, but what
do they signify in the case of a wave? We can recycle our previous
deﬁnition simply by stating it in terms of the vibrations that the
wave causes as it passes a receiving instrument at a certain point
in space. For a sound wave, this receiver could be an eardrum or
a microphone. If the vibrations of the eardrum repeat themselves
over and over, i.e., are periodic, then we describe the sound wave
that caused them as periodic. Likewise we can deﬁne the period
and frequency of a wave in terms of the period and frequency of
the vibrations it causes. As another example, a periodic water wave
would be one that caused a rubber duck to bob in a periodic manner
as they passed by it.
The period of a sound wave correlates with our sensory impres
sion of musical pitch. A high frequency (short period) is a high note.
The sounds that really deﬁne the musical notes of a song are only
the ones that are periodic. It is not possible to sing a nonperiodic
sound like “sh” with a deﬁnite pitch.
The frequency of a light wave corresponds to color. Violet is the
highfrequency end of the rainbow, red the lowfrequency end. A
color like brown that does not occur in a rainbow is not a periodic
light wave. Many phenomena that we do not normally think of as
light are actually just forms of light that are invisible because they
fall outside the range of frequencies our eyes can detect. Beyond the
red end of the visible rainbow, there are infrared and radio waves.
Past the violet end, we have ultraviolet, xrays, and gamma rays.
Graphs of waves as a function of position
Some waves, light sound waves, are easy to study by placing a
detector at a certain location in space and studying the motion as
a function of time. The result is a graph whose horizontal axis is
time. With a water wave, on the other hand, it is simpler just to
look at the wave directly. This visual snapshot amounts to a graph
of the height of the water wave as a function of position. Any wave
can be represented in either way.
An easy way to visualize this is in terms of a strip chart recorder,
an obsolescing device consisting of a pen that wiggles back and forth
as a roll of paper is fed under it. It can be used to record a per
son’s electrocardiogram, or seismic waves too small to be felt as a
noticeable earthquake but detectable by a seismometer. Taking the
seismometer as an example, the chart is essentially a record of the
ground’s wave motion as a function of time, but if the paper was set
to feed at the same velocity as the motion of an earthquake wave, it
would also be a fullscale representation of the proﬁle of the actual
60 Chapter 3 Free Waves
r / A water wave proﬁle cre
ated by a series of repeating
pulses.
wave pattern itself. Assuming, as is usually the case, that the wave
velocity is a constant number regardless of the wave’s shape, know
ing the wave motion as a function of time is equivalent to knowing
it as a function of position.
Wavelength
Any wave that is periodic will also display a repeating pattern
when graphed as a function of position. The distance spanned by
one repetition is referred to as one wavelength. The usual notation
for wavelength is λ, the Greek letter lambda. Wavelength is to space
as period is to time.
s / Wavelengths of linear and circular water waves.
Wave velocity related to frequency and wavelength
Suppose that we create a repetitive disturbance by kicking the
surface of a swimming pool. We are essentially making a series of
wave pulses. The wavelength is simply the distance a pulse is able to
travel before we make the next pulse. The distance between pulses
is λ, and the time between pulses is the period, T, so the speed of
the wave is the distance divided by the time,
v = λ/T.
This important and useful relationship is more commonly writ
ten in terms of the frequency,
v = fλ .
Wavelength of radio waves example 5
The speed of light is 3.0 × 10
8
m/s. What is the wavelength of the
radio waves emitted by KKJZ, a station whose frequency is 88.1 MHz?
Section 3.4 Periodic Waves 61
u / A water wave traveling
into a region with a different
depth changes its wavelength.
Solving for wavelength, we have
λ = v/f
= (3.0 ×10
8
m/s)/(88.1 ×10
6
s
−1
)
= 3.4 m
The size of a radio antenna is closely related to the wavelength of the
waves it is intended to receive. The match need not be exact (since
after all one antenna can receive more than one wavelength!), but the
ordinary “whip” antenna such as a car’s is 1/4 of a wavelength. An
antenna optimized to receive KKJZ’s signal would have a length of
3.4 m/4 = 0.85 m.
t / Ultrasound, i.e., sound with fre
quencies higher than the range
of human hearing, was used to
make this image of a fetus. The
resolution of the image is re
lated to the wavelength, since
details smaller than about one
wavelength cannot be resolved.
High resolution therefore requires
a short wavelength, correspond
ing to a high frequency.
The equation v = fλ deﬁnes a ﬁxed relationship between any two
of the variables if the other is held ﬁxed. The speed of radio waves
in air is almost exactly the same for all wavelengths and frequencies
(it is exactly the same if they are in a vacuum), so there is a ﬁxed
relationship between their frequency and wavelength. Thus we can
say either “Are we on the same wavelength?” or “Are we on the
same frequency?”
A diﬀerent example is the behavior of a wave that travels from
a region where the medium has one set of properties to an area
where the medium behaves diﬀerently. The frequency is now ﬁxed,
because otherwise the two portions of the wave would otherwise
get out of step, causing a kink or discontinuity at the boundary,
which would be unphysical. (A more careful argument is that a
kink or discontinuity would have inﬁnite curvature, and waves tend
to ﬂatten out their curvature. An inﬁnite curvature would ﬂatten
out inﬁnitely fast, i.e., it could never occur in the ﬁrst place.) Since
62 Chapter 3 Free Waves
the frequency must stay the same, any change in the velocity that
results from the new medium must cause a change in wavelength.
The velocity of water waves depends on the depth of the water,
so based on λ = v/f, we see that water waves that move into a
region of diﬀerent depth must change their wavelength, as shown
in the ﬁgure on the left. This eﬀect can be observed when ocean
waves come up to the shore. If the deceleration of the wave pattern
is sudden enough, the tip of the wave can curl over, resulting in a
breaking wave.
A note on dispersive waves
The discussion of wave velocity given here is actually an oversimpliﬁ
cation for a wave whose velocity depends on its frequency and wave
length. Such a wave is called a dispersive wave. Nearly all the waves
we deal with in this course are nondispersive, but the issue becomes
important in book 6 of this series, where it is discussed in more detail in
optional section 4.2.
Sinusoidal waves
Sinusoidal waves are the most important special case of periodic
waves. In fact, many scientists and engineers would be uncomfort
able with deﬁning a waveform like the “ah” vowel sound as having
a deﬁnite frequency and wavelength, because they consider only
sine waves to be pure examples of a certain frequency and wave
lengths. Their bias is not unreasonable, since the French mathe
matician Fourier showed that any periodic wave with frequency f
can be constructed as a superposition of sine waves with frequencies
f, 2f, 3f, ... In this sense, sine waves are the basic, pure building
blocks of all waves. (Fourier’s result so surprised the mathematical
community of France that he was ridiculed the ﬁrst time he publicly
presented his theorem.)
However, what deﬁnition to use is a matter of utility. Our sense
of hearing perceives any two sounds having the same period as pos
sessing the same pitch, regardless of whether they are sine waves
or not. This is undoubtedly because our earbrain system evolved
to be able to interpret human speech and animal noises, which are
periodic but not sinusoidal. Our eyes, on the other hand, judge a
color as pure (belonging to the rainbow set of colors) only if it is a
sine wave.
Discussion Question
A Suppose we superimpose two sine waves with equal amplitudes
but slightly different frequencies, as shown in the ﬁgure. What will the
superposition look like? What would this sound like if they were sound
waves?
Section 3.4 Periodic Waves 63
64 Chapter 3 Free Waves
v / The pattern of waves made
by a point source moving to the
right across the water. Note
the shorter wavelength of the
forwardemitted waves and
the longer wavelength of the
backwardgoing ones.
3.5 The Doppler Effect
Figure v shows the wave pattern made by the tip of a vibrating
rod which is moving across the water. If the rod had been vibrating
in one place, we would have seen the familiar pattern of concentric
circles, all centered on the same point. But since the source of
the waves is moving, the wavelength is shortened on one side and
lengthened on the other. This is known as the Doppler eﬀect.
Note that the velocity of the waves is a ﬁxed property of the
medium, so for example the forwardgoing waves do not get an extra
boost in speed as would a material object like a bullet being shot
forward from an airplane.
We can also infer a change in frequency. Since the velocity is
constant, the equation v = fλ tells us that the change in wave
length must be matched by an opposite change in frequency: higher
frequency for the waves emitted forward, and lower for the ones
emitted backward. The frequency Doppler eﬀect is the reason for
the familiar droppingpitch sound of a race car going by. As the car
approaches us, we hear a higher pitch, but after it passes us we hear
a frequency that is lower than normal.
The Doppler eﬀect will also occur if the observer is moving but
the source is stationary. For instance, an observer moving toward a
stationary source will perceive one crest of the wave, and will then be
surrounded by the next crest sooner than she otherwise would have,
because she has moved toward it and hastened her encounter with
it. Roughly speaking, the Doppler eﬀect depends only the relative
motion of the source and the observer, not on their absolute state
of motion (which is not a welldeﬁned notion in physics) or on their
velocity relative to the medium.
Restricting ourselves to the case of a moving source, and to waves
emitted either directly along or directly against the direction of mo
tion, we can easily calculate the wavelength, or equivalently the
frequency, of the Dopplershifted waves. Let v be the velocity of
the waves, and v
s
the velocity of the source. The wavelength of the
forwardemitted waves is shortened by an amount v
s
T equal to the
distance traveled by the source over the course of one period. Using
the deﬁnition f = 1/T and the equation v = fλ, we ﬁnd for the
wavelength of the Dopplershifted wave the equation
λ
=
_
1 −
v
s
v
_
λ .
A similar equation can be used for the backwardemitted waves, but
with a plus sign rather than a minus sign.
Dopplershifted sound from a race car example 6
If a race car moves at a velocity of 50 m/s, and the velocity of sound
is 340 m/s, by what percentage are the wavelength and frequency of its
sound waves shifted for an observer lying along its line of motion?
Section 3.5 The Doppler Effect 65
w / Example 8. A Doppler
radar image of Hurricane Katrina,
in 2005.
For an observer whom the car is approaching, we ﬁnd
1 −
v
s
v
= 0.85 ,
so the shift in wavelength is 15%. Since the frequency is inversely pro
portional to the wavelength for a ﬁxed value of the speed of sound, the
frequency is shifted upward by
1/0.85 = 1.18,
i.e., a change of 18%. (For velocities that are small compared to the
wave velocities, the Doppler shifts of the wavelength and frequency are
about the same.)
Doppler shift of the light emitted by a race car example 7
What is the percent shift in the wavelength of the light waves emitted
by a race car’s headlights?
Looking up the speed of light in the front of the book, v = 3.0 × 10
8
m/s, we ﬁnd
1 −
v
s
v
= 0.99999983 ,
i.e., the percentage shift is only 0.000017%.
The second example shows that under ordinary earthbound cir
cumstances, Doppler shifts of light are negligible because ordinary
things go so much slower than the speed of light. It’s a diﬀerent
story, however, when it comes to stars and galaxies, and this leads
us to a story that has profound implications for our understanding
of the origin of the universe.
Doppler radar example 8
The ﬁrst use of radar was by Britain during World War II: antennas on
the ground sent radio waves up into the sky, and detected the echoes
when the waves were reﬂected from German planes. Later, air forces
wanted to mount radar antennas on airplanes, but then there was a
problem, because if an airplane wanted to detect another airplane at a
lower altitude, it would have to aim its radio waves downward, and then
it would get echoes from the ground. The solution was the invention
of Doppler radar, in which echoes from the ground were differentiated
from echoes from other aircraft according to their Doppler shifts. A sim
ilar technology is used by meteorologists to map out rainclouds without
being swamped by reﬂections from the ground, trees, and buildings.
Optional topic: Doppler shifts of light
If Doppler shifts depend only on the relative motion of the source and
receiver, then there is no way for a person moving with the source and
another person moving with the receiver to determine who is moving
and who isn’t. Either can blame the Doppler shift entirely on the other’s
motion and claim to be at rest herself. This is entirely in agreement with
the principle stated originally by Galileo that all motion is relative.
On the other hand, a careful analysis of the Doppler shifts of water
or sound waves shows that it is only approximately true, at low speeds,
that the shifts just depend on the relative motion of the source and ob
server. For instance, it is possible for a jet plane to keep up with its own
sound waves, so that the sound waves appear to stand still to the pilot
66 Chapter 3 Free Waves
x / The galaxy M51. Under
high magniﬁcation, the milky
clouds reveal themselves to be
composed of trillions of stars.
of the plane. The pilot then knows she is moving at exactly the speed
of sound. The reason this doesn’t disprove the relativity of motion is
that the pilot is not really determining her absolute motion but rather her
motion relative to the air, which is the medium of the sound waves.
Einstein realized that this solved the problem for sound or water
waves, but would not salvage the principle of relative motion in the case
of light waves, since light is not a vibration of any physical medium such
as water or air. Beginning by imagining what a beam of light would
look like to a person riding a motorcycle alongside it, Einstein even
tually came up with a radical new way of describing the universe, in
which space and time are distorted as measured by observers in differ
ent states of motion. As a consequence of this Theory of Relativity, he
showed that light waves would have Doppler shifts that would exactly,
not just approximately, depend only on the relative motion of the source
and receiver.
The Big Bang
As soon as astronomers began looking at the sky through tele
scopes, they began noticing certain objects that looked like clouds
in deep space. The fact that they looked the same night after night
meant that they were beyond the earth’s atmosphere. Not know
ing what they really were, but wanting to sound oﬃcial, they called
them “nebulae,” a Latin word meaning “clouds” but sounding more
impressive. In the early 20th century, astronomers realized that al
though some really were clouds of gas (e.g., the middle “star” of
Orion’s sword, which is visibly fuzzy even to the naked eye when
conditions are good), others were what we now call galaxies: virtual
island universes consisting of trillions of stars (for example the An
dromeda Galaxy, which is visible as a fuzzy patch through binoc
ulars). Three hundred years after Galileo had resolved the Milky
Way into individual stars through his telescope, astronomers real
ized that the universe is made of galaxies of stars, and the Milky
Way is simply the visible part of the ﬂat disk of our own galaxy,
seen from inside.
This opened up the scientiﬁc study of cosmology, the structure
and history of the universe as a whole, a ﬁeld that had not been
seriously attacked since the days of Newton. Newton had realized
that if gravity was always attractive, never repulsive, the universe
would have a tendency to collapse. His solution to the problem was
to posit a universe that was inﬁnite and uniformly populated with
matter, so that it would have no geometrical center. The gravita
tional forces in such a universe would always tend to cancel out by
symmetry, so there would be no collapse. By the 20th century, the
belief in an unchanging and inﬁnite universe had become conven
tional wisdom in science, partly as a reaction against the time that
had been wasted trying to ﬁnd explanations of ancient geological
phenomena based on catastrophes suggested by biblical events like
Noah’s ﬂood.
In the 1920’s astronomer Edwin Hubble began studying the
Section 3.5 The Doppler Effect 67
y / How do astronomers know
what mixture of wavelengths a
star emitted originally, so that
they can tell how much the
Doppler shift was? This image
(obtained by the author with
equipment costing about $5, and
no telescope) shows the mixture
of colors emitted by the star
Sirius. (If you have the book in
black and white, blue is on the left
and red on the right.) The star
appears white or bluishwhite to
the eye, but any light looks white
if it contains roughly an equal
mixture of the rainbow colors,
i.e., of all the pure sinusoidal
waves with wavelengths lying in
the visible range. Note the black
“gap teeth.” These are the ﬁn
gerprint of hydrogen in the outer
atmosphere of Sirius. These
wavelengths are selectively ab
sorbed by hydrogen. Sirius is in
our own galaxy, but similar stars
in other galaxies would have
the whole pattern shifted toward
the red end, indicating they are
moving away from us.
z / The telescope at Mount
Wilson used by Hubble.
Doppler shifts of the light emitted by galaxies. A former college
football player with a serious nicotine addiction, Hubble did not
set out to change our image of the beginning of the universe. His
autobiography seldom even mentions the cosmological discovery for
which he is now remembered. When astronomers began to study the
Doppler shifts of galaxies, they expected that each galaxy’s direction
and velocity of motion would be essentially random. Some would be
approaching us, and their light would therefore be Dopplershifted
to the blue end of the spectrum, while an equal number would be
expected to have red shifts. What Hubble discovered instead was
that except for a few very nearby ones, all the galaxies had red
shifts, indicating that they were receding from us at a hefty frac
tion of the speed of light. Not only that, but the ones farther away
were receding more quickly. The speeds were directly proportional
to their distance from us.
Did this mean that the earth (or at least our galaxy) was the
center of the universe? No, because Doppler shifts of light only
depend on the relative motion of the source and the observer. If
we see a distant galaxy moving away from us at 10% of the speed
of light, we can be assured that the astronomers who live in that
galaxy will see ours receding from them at the same speed in the
opposite direction. The whole universe can be envisioned as a rising
loaf of raisin bread. As the bread expands, there is more and more
space between the raisins. The farther apart two raisins are, the
greater the speed with which they move apart.
Extrapolating backward in time using the known laws of physics,
the universe must have been denser and denser at earlier and earlier
times. At some point, it must have been extremely dense and hot,
and we can even detect the radiation from this early ﬁreball, in the
form of microwave radiation that permeates space. The phrase Big
Bang was originally coined by the doubters of the theory to make it
sound ridiculous, but it stuck, and today essentially all astronomers
accept the Big Bang theory based on the very direct evidence of the
red shifts and the cosmic microwave background radiation.
What the big bang is not
Finally it should be noted what the Big Bang theory is not. It is
not an explanation of why the universe exists. Such questions belong
to the realm of religion, not science. Science can ﬁnd ever simpler
and ever more fundamental explanations for a variety of phenom
ena, but ultimately science takes the universe as it is according to
observations.
Furthermore, there is an unfortunate tendency, even among many
scientists, to speak of the Big Bang theory as a description of the
very ﬁrst event in the universe, which caused everything after it.
Although it is true that time may have had a beginning (Einstein’s
theory of general relativity admits such a possibility), the methods
68 Chapter 3 Free Waves
aa / Shock waves from by
the X15 rocket plane, ﬂying at
3.5 times the speed of sound.
ab / This ﬁghter jet has just
accelerated past the speed of
sound. The sudden decom
pression of the air causes water
droplets to condense, forming a
cloud.
of science can only work within a certain range of conditions such
as temperature and density. Beyond a temperature of about 10
9
degrees C, the random thermal motion of subatomic particles be
comes so rapid that its velocity is comparable to the speed of light.
Early enough in the history of the universe, when these temperatures
existed, Newtonian physics becomes less accurate, and we must de
scribe nature using the more general description given by Einstein’s
theory of relativity, which encompasses Newtonian physics as a spe
cial case. At even higher temperatures, beyond about 10
33
degrees,
physicists know that Einstein’s theory as well begins to fall apart,
but we don’t know how to construct the even more general theory
of nature that would work at those temperatures. No matter how
far physics progresses, we will never be able to describe nature at
inﬁnitely high temperatures, since there is a limit to the temper
atures we can explore by experiment and observation in order to
guide us to the right theory. We are conﬁdent that we understand
the basic physics involved in the evolution of the universe starting a
few minutes after the Big Bang, and we may be able to push back to
milliseconds or microseconds after it, but we cannot use the methods
of science to deal with the beginning of time itself.
Discussion Questions
A If an airplane travels at exactly the speed of sound, what would be
the wavelength of the forwardemitted part of the sound waves it emitted?
How should this be interpreted, and what would actually happen? What
happens if it’s going faster than the speed of sound? Can you use this to
explain what you see in ﬁgures aa and ab?
B If bullets go slower than the speed of sound, why can a supersonic
ﬁghter plane catch up to its own sound, but not to its own bullets?
C If someone inside a plane is talking to you, should their speech be
Doppler shifted?
Section 3.5 The Doppler Effect 69
Summary
Selected Vocabulary
superposition . . the adding together of waves that overlap with
each other
medium . . . . . a physical substance whose vibrations consti
tute a wave
wavelength . . . . the distance in space between repetitions of a
periodic wave
Doppler eﬀect . . the change in a wave’s frequency and wave
length due to the motion of the source or the
observer or both
Notation
λ . . . . . . . . . . wavelength (Greek letter lambda)
Summary
Wave motion diﬀers in three important ways from the motion of
material objects:
(1) Waves obey the principle of superposition. When two waves
collide, they simply add together.
(2) The medium is not transported along with the wave. The
motion of any given point in the medium is a vibration about its
equilibrium location, not a steady forward motion.
(3) The velocity of a wave depends on the medium, not on the
amount of energy in the wave. (For some types of waves, notably
water waves, the velocity may also depend on the shape of the wave.)
Sound waves consist of increases and decreases (typically very
small ones) in the density of the air. Light is a wave, but it is a
vibration of electric and magnetic ﬁelds, not of any physical medium.
Light can travel through a vacuum.
A periodic wave is one that creates a periodic motion in a receiver
as it passes it. Such a wave has a welldeﬁned period and frequency,
and it will also have a wavelength, which is the distance in space
between repetitions of the wave pattern. The velocity, frequency,
and wavelength of a periodic wave are related by the equation
v = fλ.
A wave emitted by a moving source will be shifted in wavelength
and frequency. The shifted wavelength is given by the equation
λ
=
_
1 −
v
s
v
_
λ ,
where v is the velocity of the waves and v
s
is the velocity of the
source, taken to be positive or negative so as to produce a Doppler
lengthened wavelength if the source is receding and a Doppler
shortened one if it approaches. A similar shift occurs if the observer
70 Chapter 3 Free Waves
is moving, and in general the Doppler shift depends approximately
only on the relative motion of the source and observer if their ve
locities are both small compared to the waves’ velocity. (This is not
just approximately but exactly true for light waves, and this fact
forms the basis of Einstein’s Theory of Relativity.)
Summary 71
Problem 3.
Problem 2.
Problems
Key
√
A computerized answer check is available online.
_
A problem that requires calculus.
A diﬃcult problem.
1 The following is a graph of the height of a water wave as a
function of position, at a certain moment in time.
Trace this graph onto another piece of paper, and then sketch below
it the corresponding graphs that would be obtained if
(a) the amplitude and frequency were doubled while the velocity
remained the same;
(b) the frequency and velocity were both doubled while the ampli
tude remained unchanged;
(c) the wavelength and amplitude were reduced by a factor of three
while the velocity was doubled.
[Problem by Arnold Arons.]
2 (a) The graph shows the height of a water wave pulse as a
function of position. Draw a graph of height as a function of time
for a speciﬁc point on the water. Assume the pulse is traveling to
the right.
(b) Repeat part a, but assume the pulse is traveling to the left.
(c) Now assume the original graph was of height as a function of
time, and draw a graph of height as a function of position, assuming
the pulse is traveling to the right.
(d) Repeat part c, but assume the pulse is traveling to the left.
[Problem by Arnold Arons.]
3 The ﬁgure shows one wavelength of a steady sinusoidal wave
traveling to the right along a string. Deﬁne a coordinate system
in which the positive x axis points to the right and the positive y
axis up, such that the ﬂattened string would have y = 0. Copy
the ﬁgure, and label with y = 0 all the appropriate parts of the
string. Similarly, label with v = 0 all parts of the string whose
velocities are zero, and with a = 0 all parts whose accelerations
are zero. There is more than one point whose velocity is of the
greatest magnitude. Pick one of these, and indicate the direction of
its velocity vector. Do the same for a point having the maximum
magnitude of acceleration.
72 Chapter 3 Free Waves
[Problem by Arnold Arons.]
4 Find an equation for the relationship between the Doppler
shifted frequency of a wave and the frequency of the original wave,
for the case of a stationary observer and a source moving directly
toward or away from the observer.
5 Suggest a quantitative experiment to look for any deviation
from the principle of superposition for surface waves in water. Make
it simple and practical.
6 The musical note middle C has a frequency of 262 Hz. What
are its period and wavelength?
√
7 Singing that is oﬀpitch by more than about 1% sounds bad.
How fast would a singer have to be moving relative to a the rest of
a band to make this much of a change in pitch due to the Doppler
eﬀect?
√
8 In section 3.2, we saw that the speed of waves on a string
depends on the ratio of T/µ, i.e., the speed of the wave is greater if
the string is under more tension, and less if it has more inertia. This
is true in general: the speed of a mechanical wave always depends
on the medium’s inertia in relation to the restoring force (tension,
stiﬀness, resistance to compression,...) Based on these ideas, explain
why the speed of sound in a gas depends strongly on temperature,
while the speed of sounds in liquids and solids does not.
Problems 73
74 Chapter 3 Free Waves
A crosssectional view of a human body, showing the vocal tract.
Chapter 4
Bounded Waves
Speech is what separates humans most decisively from animals. No
other species can master syntax, and even though chimpanzees can
learn a vocabulary of hand signs, there is an unmistakable diﬀerence
between a human infant and a baby chimp: starting from birth, the
human experiments with the production of complex speech sounds.
Since speech sounds are instinctive for us, we seldom think about
them consciously. How do we do control sound waves so skillfully?
Mostly we do it by changing the shape of a connected set of hollow
cavities in our chest, throat, and head. Somehow by moving the
boundaries of this space in and out, we can produce all the vowel
sounds. Up until now, we have been studying only those properties
of waves that can be understood as if they existed in an inﬁnite,
open space. In this chapter we address what happens when a wave is
conﬁned within a certain space, or when a wave pattern encounters
the boundary between two diﬀerent media, as when a light wave
moving through air encounters a glass windowpane.
75
a / A diver photographed this ﬁsh,
and its reﬂection, from underwa
ter. The reﬂection is the one on
top, and is formed by light waves
that went up to the surface of
the water, but were then reﬂected
back down into the water.
4.1 Reﬂection, Transmission, and Absorption
Reﬂection and transmission
Sound waves can echo back from a cliﬀ, and light waves are
reﬂected from the surface of a pond. We use the word reﬂection,
normally applied only to light waves in ordinary speech, to describe
any such case of a wave rebounding from a barrier. Figure b shows
a circular water wave being reﬂected from a straight wall. In this
chapter, we will concentrate mainly on reﬂection of waves that move
in one dimension, as in ﬁgure c.
Wave reﬂection does not surprise us. After all, a material object
such as a rubber ball would bounce back in the same way. But waves
are not objects, and there are some surprises in store.
First, only part of the wave is usually reﬂected. Looking out
through a window, we see light waves that passed through it, but a
person standing outside would also be able to see her reﬂection in
the glass. A light wave that strikes the glass is partly reﬂected and
partly transmitted (passed) by the glass. The energy of the original
wave is split between the two. This is diﬀerent from the behavior of
the rubber ball, which must go one way or the other, not both.
Second, consider what you see if you are swimming underwater
and you look up at the surface. You see your own reﬂection. This
is utterly counterintuitive, since we would expect the light waves to
burst forth to freedom in the wideopen air. A material projectile
shot up toward the surface would never rebound from the waterair
76 Chapter 4 Bounded Waves
b / Circular water waves are
reﬂected from a boundary on the
left.
c / A wave on a spring, ini
tially traveling to the left, is
reﬂected from the ﬁxed end.
boundary! Figure a shows a similar example.
What is it about the diﬀerence between two media that causes
waves to be partly reﬂected at the boundary between them? Is
it their density? Their chemical composition? Ultimately all that
matters is the speed of the wave in the two media. A wave is partially
reﬂected and partially transmitted at the boundary between media in
which it has diﬀerent speeds. For example, the speed of light waves
in window glass is about 30% less than in air, which explains why
windows always make reﬂections. Figures d/1 and 2 show examples
of wave pulses being reﬂected at the boundary between two coil
springs of diﬀerent weights, in which the wave speed is diﬀerent.
Reﬂections such as b and c, where a wave encounters a massive
ﬁxed object, can usually be understood on the same basis as cases
like d/1 and 2 later in his section, where two media meet. Example
c, for instance, is like a more extreme version of example d/1. If the
heavy coil spring in d/1 was made heavier and heavier, it would end
up acting like the ﬁxed wall to which the light spring in c has been
attached.
selfcheck A
In ﬁgure c, the reﬂected pulse is upsidedown, but its depth is just as
big as the original pulse’s height. How does the energy of the reﬂected
pulse compare with that of the original? Answer, p. 100
Fish have internal ears. example 1
Why don’t ﬁsh have earholes? The speed of sound waves in a ﬁsh’s
body is not much different from their speed in water, so sound waves
are not strongly reﬂected from a ﬁsh’s skin. They pass right through its
body, so ﬁsh can have internal ears.
Whale songs traveling long distances example 2
Sound waves travel at drastically different speeds through rock, water,
and air. Whale songs are thus strongly reﬂected at both the bottom and
the surface. The sound waves can travel hundreds of miles, bouncing
repeatedly between the bottom and the surface, and still be detectable.
Sadly, noise pollution from ships has nearly shut down this cetacean
version of the internet.
Longdistance radio communication. example 3
Radio communication can occur between stations on opposite sides of
the planet. The mechanism is similar to the one explained in example
2, but the three media involved are the earth, the atmosphere, and the
ionosphere.
selfcheck B
Sonar is a method for ships and submarines to detect each other by
producing sound waves and listening for echoes. What properties would
an underwater object have to have in order to be invisible to sonar?
Answer, p. 100
The use of the word “reﬂection” naturally brings to mind the cre
ation of an image by a mirror, but this might be confusing, because
we do not normally refer to “reﬂection” when we look at surfaces
Section 4.1 Reﬂection, Transmission, and Absorption 77
that are not shiny. Nevertheless, reﬂection is how we see the surfaces
of all objects, not just polished ones. When we look at a sidewalk,
for example, we are actually seeing the reﬂecting of the sun from
the concrete. The reason we don’t see an image of the sun at our
feet is simply that the rough surface blurs the image so drastically.
d / 1. A wave in the lighter spring, where the wave speed is greater,
travels to the left and is then partly reﬂected and partly transmitted at the
boundary with the heavier coil spring, which has a lower wave speed.
The reﬂection is inverted. 2. A wave moving to the right in the heavier
spring is partly reﬂected at the boundary with the lighter spring. The
reﬂection is uninverted.
Inverted and uninverted reﬂections
Notice how the pulse reﬂected back to the right in example d/1
comes back upsidedown, whereas the one reﬂected back to the left
78 Chapter 4 Bounded Waves
e / 1. An uninverted reﬂec
tion. The reﬂected pulse is
reversed front to back, but is
not upsidedown. 2. An inverted
reﬂection. The reﬂected pulse is
reversed both front to back and
top to bottom.
f / A pulse traveling through
a highly absorptive medium.
in 2 returns in its original upright form. This is true for other waves
as well. In general, there are two possible types of reﬂections, a
reﬂection back into a faster medium and a reﬂection back into a
slower medium. One type will always be an inverting reﬂection and
one noninverting.
It’s important to realize that when we discuss inverted and un
inverted reﬂections on a string, we are talking about whether the
wave is ﬂipped across the direction of motion (i.e., upsidedown in
these drawings). The reﬂected pulse will always be reversed front
to back, as shown in ﬁgure e. This is because it is traveling in the
other direction. The leading edge of the pulse is what gets reﬂected
ﬁrst, so it is still ahead when it starts back to the left — it’s just
that “ahead” is now in the opposite direction.
Absorption
So far we have tacitly assumed that wave energy remains as wave
energy, and is not converted to any other form. If this was true, then
the world would become more and more full of sound waves, which
could never escape into the vacuum of outer space. In reality, any
mechanical wave consists of a traveling pattern of vibrations of some
physical medium, and vibrations of matter always produce heat, as
when you bend a coathangar back and forth and it becomes hot.
We can thus expect that in mechanical waves such as water waves,
sound waves, or waves on a string, the wave energy will gradually
be converted into heat. This is referred to as absorption.
The wave suﬀers a decrease in amplitude, as shown in ﬁgure f.
The decrease in amplitude amounts to the same fractional change
for each unit of distance covered. For example, if a wave decreases
from amplitude 2 to amplitude 1 over a distance of 1 meter, then
after traveling another meter it will have an amplitude of 1/2. That
is, the reduction in amplitude is exponential. This can be proven
as follows. By the principle of superposition, we know that a wave
of amplitude 2 must behave like the superposition of two identical
waves of amplitude 1. If a single amplitude1 wave would die down to
amplitude 1/2 over a certain distance, then two amplitude1 waves
superposed on top of one another to make amplitude 1+1 = 2 must
die down to amplitude 1/2 + 1/2 = 1 over the same distance.
selfcheck C
As a wave undergoes absorption, it loses energy. Does this mean that
it slows down? Answer, p. 100
In many cases, this frictional heating eﬀect is quite weak. Sound
waves in air, for instance, dissipate into heat extremely slowly, and
the sound of church music in a cathedral may reverberate for as much
as 3 or 4 seconds before it becomes inaudible. During this time it
has traveled over a kilometer! Even this very gradual dissipation
of energy occurs mostly as heating of the church’s walls and by the
Section 4.1 Reﬂection, Transmission, and Absorption 79
g / Xrays are light waves with a
very high frequency. They are
absorbed strongly by bones, but
weakly by ﬂesh.
leaking of sound to the outside (where it will eventually end up as
heat). Under the right conditions (humid air and low frequency), a
sound wave in a straight pipe could theoretically travel hundreds of
kilometers before being noticeably attenuated.
In general, the absorption of mechanical waves depends a great
deal on the chemical composition and microscopic structure of the
medium. Ripples on the surface of antifreeze, for instance, die out
extremely rapidly compared to ripples on water. For sound waves
and surface waves in liquids and gases, what matters is the viscosity
of the substance, i.e., whether it ﬂows easily like water or mercury
or more sluggishly like molasses or antifreeze. This explains why
our intuitive expectation of strong absorption of sound in water is
incorrect. Water is a very weak absorber of sound (viz. whale songs
and sonar), and our incorrect intuition arises from focusing on the
wrong property of the substance: water’s high density, which is
irrelevant, rather than its low viscosity, which is what matters.
Light is an interesting case, since although it can travel through
matter, it is not itself a vibration of any material substance. Thus
we can look at the star Sirius, 10
14
km away from us, and be as
sured that none of its light was absorbed in the vacuum of outer
space during its 9year journey to us. The Hubble Space Telescope
routinely observes light that has been on its way to us since the
early history of the universe, billions of years ago. Of course the
energy of light can be dissipated if it does pass through matter (and
the light from distant galaxies is often absorbed if there happen to
be clouds of gas or dust in between).
Soundprooﬁng example 4
Typical amateur musicians setting out to soundproof their garages tend
to think that they should simply cover the walls with the densest possible
substance. In fact, sound is not absorbed very strongly even by passing
through several inches of wood. A better strategy for soundprooﬁng is to
create a sandwich of alternating layers of materials in which the speed
of sound is very different, to encourage reﬂection.
The classic design is alternating layers of ﬁberglass and plywood. The
speed of sound in plywood is very high, due to its stiffness, while its
speed in ﬁberglass is essentially the same as its speed in air. Both
materials are fairly good sound absorbers, but sound waves passing
through a few inches of them are still not going to be absorbed sufﬁ
ciently. The point of combining them is that a sound wave that tries
to get out will be strongly reﬂected at each of the ﬁberglassplywood
boundaries, and will bounce back and forth many times like a ping pong
ball. Due to all the backandforth motion, the sound may end up travel
ing a total distance equal to ten times the actual thickness of the sound
prooﬁng before it escapes. This is the equivalent of having ten times
the thickness of soundabsorbing material.
The swim bladder example 5
The swim bladder of a ﬁsh, which was ﬁrst discussed in homework prob
lem 2 in chapter 2, is often located right next to the ﬁsh’s ear. As dis
80 Chapter 4 Bounded Waves
cussed in example 1 on page 77, the ﬁsh’s body is nearly transparent
to sound, so it’s actually difﬁcult to get any of the sound wave energy to
deposit itself in the ﬁsh so that the ﬁsh can hear it! The physics here
is almost exactly the same as the physics of example 4 above, with the
gasﬁlled swim bladder playing the role of the lowdensity material.
Radio transmission example 6
A radio transmitting station, such as a commercial station or an amateur
“ham” radio station, must have a length of wire or cable connecting the
ampliﬁer to the antenna. The cable and the antenna act as two different
media for radio waves, and there will therefore be partial reﬂection of the
waves as they come from the cable to the antenna. If the waves bounce
back and forth many times between the ampliﬁer and the antenna, a
great deal of their energy will be absorbed. There are two ways to
attack the problem. One possibility is to design the antenna so that
the speed of the waves in it is as close as possible to the speed of
the waves in the cable; this minimizes the amount of reﬂection. The
other method is to connect the ampliﬁer to the antenna using a type of
wire or cable that does not strongly absorb the waves. Partial reﬂection
then becomes irrelevant, since all the wave energy will eventually exit
through the antenna.
Discussion Question
A A sound wave that underwent a pressureinverting reﬂection would
have its compressions converted to expansions and vice versa. How
would its energy and frequency compare with those of the original sound?
Would it sound any different? What happens if you swap the two wires
where they connect to a stereo speaker, resulting in waves that vibrate in
the opposite way?
Section 4.1 Reﬂection, Transmission, and Absorption 81
h / 1. A change in frequency
without a change in wavelength
would produce a discontinuity in
the wave. 2. A simple change in
wavelength without a reﬂection
would result in a sharp kink in the
wave.
4.2 Quantitative Treatment of Reﬂection
In this optional section we analyze the reasons why reﬂections occur
at a speedchanging boundary, predict quantitatively the intensities
of reﬂection and transmission, and discuss how to predict for any
type of wave which reﬂections are inverting and which are nonin
verting. The gory details are likely to be of interest mainly to stu
dents with concentrations in the physical sciences, but all readers
are encouraged at least to skim the ﬁrst two subsections for physical
insight.
Why reﬂection occurs
To understand the fundamental reasons for what does occur at
the boundary between media, let’s ﬁrst discuss what doesn’t happen.
For the sake of concreteness, consider a sinusoidal wave on a string.
If the wave progresses from a heavier portion of the string, in which
its velocity is low, to a lighterweight part, in which it is high, then
the equation v = fλ tells us that it must change its frequency, or
its wavelength, or both. If only the frequency changed, then the
parts of the wave in the two diﬀerent portions of the string would
quickly get out of step with each other, producing a discontinuity in
the wave, h/1. This is unphysical, so we know that the wavelength
must change while the frequency remains constant, 2.
But there is still something unphysical about ﬁgure 2. The sud
den change in the shape of the wave has resulted in a sharp kink
at the boundary. This can’t really happen, because the medium
tends to accelerate in such a way as to eliminate curvature. A sharp
kink corresponds to an inﬁnite curvature at one point, which would
produce an inﬁnite acceleration, which would not be consistent with
the smooth pattern of wave motion envisioned in ﬁgure 2. Waves
can have kinks, but not stationary kinks.
We conclude that without positing partial reﬂection of the wave,
we cannot simultaneously satisfy the requirements of (1) continuity
of the wave, and (2) no sudden changes in the slope of the wave.
(The student who has studied calculus will recognize this as amount
ing to an assumption that both the wave and its derivative are con
tinuous functions.)
Does this amount to a proof that reﬂection occurs? Not quite.
We have only proven that certain types of wave motion are not
valid solutions. In the following subsection, we prove that a valid
solution can always be found in which a reﬂection occurs. Now in
physics, we normally assume (but seldom prove formally) that the
equations of motion have a unique solution, since otherwise a given
set of initial conditions could lead to diﬀerent behavior later on,
but the Newtonian universe is supposed to be deterministic. Since
the solution must be unique, and we derive below a valid solution
involving a reﬂected pulse, we will have ended up with what amounts
82 Chapter 4 Bounded Waves
i / A pulse being partially re
ﬂected and partially transmitted
at the boundary between two
strings in which the speed of
waves is different. The top
drawing shows the pulse heading
to the right, toward the heavier
string. For clarity, all but the ﬁrst
and last drawings are schematic.
Once the reﬂected pulse begins
to emerge from the boundary,
it adds together with the trailing
parts of the incident pulse. Their
sum, shown as a wider line, is
what is actually observed.
to a proof of reﬂection.
Intensity of reﬂection
We will now show, in the case of waves on a string, that it is pos
sible to satisfy the physical requirements given above by construct
ing a reﬂected wave, and as a bonus this will produce an equation
for the proportions of reﬂection and transmission and a prediction
as to which conditions will lead to inverted and which to uninverted
reﬂection. We assume only that the principle of superposition holds,
which is a good approximations for waves on a string of suﬃciently
small amplitude.
Let the unknown amplitudes of the reﬂected and transmitted
waves be R and T, respectively. An inverted reﬂection would be
represented by a negative value of R. We can without loss of gen
erality take the incident (original) wave to have unit amplitude.
Superposition tells us that if, for instance, the incident wave had
double this amplitude, we could immediately ﬁnd a corresponding
solution simply by doubling R and T.
Just to the left of the boundary, the height of the wave is given
by the height 1 of the incident wave, plus the height R of the part
of the reﬂected wave that has just been created and begun heading
back, for a total height of 1+R. On the right side immediately next
to the boundary, the transmitted wave has a height T. To avoid a
discontinuity, we must have
1 +R = T .
Next we turn to the requirement of equal slopes on both sides of
the boundary. Let the slope of the incoming wave be s immediately
to the left of the junction. If the wave was 100% reﬂected, and
without inversion, then the slope of the reﬂected wave would be −s,
since the wave has been reversed in direction. In general, the slope
of the reﬂected wave equals −sR, and the slopes of the superposed
waves on the left side add up to s − sR. On the right, the slope
depends on the amplitude, T, but is also changed by the stretching
or compression of the wave due to the change in speed. If, for
example, the wave speed is twice as great on the right side, then
the slope is cut in half by this eﬀect. The slope on the right is
therefore s(v
1
/v
2
)T, where v
1
is the velocity in the original medium
and v
2
the velocity in the new medium. Equality of slopes gives
s −sR = s(v
1
/v
2
)T, or
1 −R =
v
1
v
2
T .
Solving the two equations for the unknowns R and T gives
R =
v
2
−v
1
v
2
+v
1
and T =
2v
2
v
2
+v
1
.
Section 4.2 Quantitative Treatment of Reﬂection 83
j / A disturbance in freeway
trafﬁc.
The ﬁrst equation shows that there is no reﬂection unless the two
wave speeds are diﬀerent, and that the reﬂection is inverted in re
ﬂection back into a fast medium.
The energies of the transmitted and reﬂected wavers always add
up to the same as the energy of the original wave. There is never
any abrupt loss (or gain) in energy when a wave crosses a bound
ary. (Conversion of wave energy to heat occurs for many types of
waves, but it occurs throughout the medium.) The equation for
T, surprisingly, allows the amplitude of the transmitted wave to be
greater than 1, i.e., greater than that of the incident wave. This
does not violate conservation of energy, because this occurs when
the second string is less massive, reducing its kinetic energy, and the
transmitted pulse is broader and less strongly curved, which lessens
its potential energy.
Inverted and uninverted reﬂections in general
For waves on a string, reﬂections back into a faster medium are
inverted, while those back into a slower medium are uninverted. Is
this true for all types of waves? The rather subtle answer is that it
depends on what property of the wave you are discussing.
Let’s start by considering wave disturbances of freeway traﬃc.
Anyone who has driven frequently on crowded freeways has observed
the phenomenon in which one driver taps the brakes, starting a chain
reaction that travels backward down the freeway as each person in
turn exercises caution in order to avoid rearending anyone. The
reason why this type of wave is relevant is that it gives a simple,
easily visualized example of our description of a wave depends on
which aspect of the wave we have in mind. In steadily ﬂowing free
way traﬃc, both the density of cars and their velocity are constant
all along the road. Since there is no disturbance in this pattern of
constant velocity and density, we say that there is no wave. Now if
a wave is touched oﬀ by a person tapping the brakes, we can either
describe it as a region of high density or as a region of decreasing
velocity.
The freeway traﬃc wave is in fact a good model of a sound wave,
and a sound wave can likewise be described either by the density
(or pressure) of the air or by its speed. Likewise many other types
of waves can be described by either of two functions, one of which
is often the derivative of the other with respect to position.
Now let’s consider reﬂections. If we observe the freeway wave in
a mirror, the highdensity area will still appear high in density, but
velocity in the opposite direction will now be described by a neg
ative number. A person observing the mirror image will draw the
same density graph, but the velocity graph will be ﬂipped across the
x axis, and its original region of negative slope will now have posi
tive slope. Although I don’t know any physical situation that would
84 Chapter 4 Bounded Waves
correspond to the reﬂection of a traﬃc wave, we can immediately ap
ply the same reasoning to sound waves, which often do get reﬂected,
and determine that a reﬂection can either be densityinverting and
velocitynoninverting or densitynoninverting and velocityinverting.
This same type of situation will occur over and over as one en
counters new types of waves, and to apply the analogy we need
only determine which quantities, like velocity, become negated in a
mirror image and which, like density, stay the same.
A light wave, for instance consists of a traveling pattern of elec
tric and magnetic ﬁelds. All you need to know in order to analyze the
reﬂection of light waves is how electric and magnetic ﬁelds behave
under reﬂection; you don’t need to know any of the detailed physics
of electricity and magnetism. An electric ﬁeld can be detected, for
example, by the way one’s hair stands on end. The direction of
the hair indicates the direction of the electric ﬁeld. In a mirror im
age, the hair points the other way, so the electric ﬁeld is apparently
reversed in a mirror image. The behavior of magnetic ﬁelds, how
ever, is a little tricky. The magnetic properties of a bar magnet,
for instance, are caused by the aligned rotation of the outermost
orbiting electrons of the atoms. In a mirror image, the direction of
rotation is reversed, say from clockwise to counterclockwise, and so
the magnetic ﬁeld is reversed twice: once simply because the whole
picture is ﬂipped and once because of the reversed rotation of the
electrons. In other words, magnetic ﬁelds do not reverse themselves
in a mirror image. We can thus predict that there will be two pos
sible types of reﬂection of light waves. In one, the electric ﬁeld is
inverted and the magnetic ﬁeld uninverted. In the other, the electric
ﬁeld is uninverted and the magnetic ﬁeld inverted.
Section 4.2 Quantitative Treatment of Reﬂection 85
k / Seen from this angle, the
optical coating on the lenses of
these binoculars appears purple
and green. (The color varies
depending on the angle from
which the coating is viewed, and
the angle varies across the faces
of the lenses because of their
curvature.)
l / A rope consisting of three
sections, the middle one being
lighter.
m / Two reﬂections, are su
perimposed. One reﬂection is
inverted.
4.3 Interference Effects
If you look at the front of a pair of highquality binoculars, you
will notice a greenishblue coating on the lenses. This is advertised
as a coating to prevent reﬂection. Now reﬂection is clearly undesir
able — we want the light to go in the binoculars — but so far I’ve
described reﬂection as an unalterable fact of nature, depending only
on the properties of the two wave media. The coating can’t change
the speed of light in air or in glass, so how can it work? The key is
that the coating itself is a wave medium. In other words, we have
a threelayer sandwich of materials: air, coating, and glass. We will
analyze the way the coating works, not because optical coatings are
an important part of your education but because it provides a good
example of the general phenomenon of wave interference eﬀects.
There are two diﬀerent interfaces between media: an aircoating
boundary and a coatingglass boundary. Partial reﬂection and par
tial transmission will occur at each boundary. For ease of visual
ization let’s start by considering an equivalent system consisting of
three dissimilar pieces of string tied together, and a wave pattern
consisting initially of a single pulse. Figure l/1 shows the incident
pulse moving through the heavy rope, in which its velocity is low.
When it encounters the lighterweight rope in the middle, a faster
medium, it is partially reﬂected and partially transmitted. (The
transmitted pulse is bigger, but nevertheless has only part of the
original energy.) The pulse transmitted by the ﬁrst interface is then
partially reﬂected and partially transmitted by the second bound
ary, 3. In ﬁgure 4, two pulses are on the way back out to the left,
and a single pulse is heading oﬀ to the right. (There is still a weak
pulse caught between the two boundaries, and this will rattle back
and forth, rapidly getting too weak to detect as it leaks energy to
the outside with each partial reﬂection.)
Note how, of the two reﬂected pulses in 4, one is inverted and
one uninverted. One underwent reﬂection at the ﬁrst boundary (a
reﬂection back into a slower medium is uninverted), but the other
was reﬂected at the second boundary (reﬂection back into a faster
medium is inverted).
Now let’s imagine what would have happened if the incoming
wave pattern had been a long sinusoidal wave train instead of a
single pulse. The ﬁrst two waves to reemerge on the left could be
in phase, m/1, or out of phase, 2, or anywhere in between. The
amount of lag between them depends entirely on the width of the
middle segment of string. If we choose the width of the middle string
segment correctly, then we can arrange for destructive interference
to occur, 2, with cancellation resulting in a very weak reﬂected wave.
This whole analysis applies directly to our original case of optical
coatings. Visible light from most sources does consist of a stream of
short sinusoidal wavetrains such as the ones drawn above. The only
86 Chapter 4 Bounded Waves
n / A soap bubble displays
interference effects.
real diﬀerence between the wavesonarope example and the case of
an optical coating is that the ﬁrst and third media are air and glass,
in which light does not have the same speed. However, the general
result is the same as long as the air and the glass have lightwave
speeds that either both greater than the coating’s or both less than
the coating’s.
The business of optical coatings turns out to be a very arcane
one, with a plethora of trade secrets and “black magic” techniques
handed down from master to apprentice. Nevertheless, the ideas
you have learned about waves in general are suﬃcient to allow you
to come to some deﬁnite conclusions without any further technical
knowledge. The selfcheck and discussion questions will direct you
along these lines of thought.
The example of an optical coating was typical of a wide variety
of wave interference eﬀects. With a little guidance, you are now
ready to ﬁgure out for yourself other examples such as the rainbow
pattern made by a compact disc, a layer of oil on a puddle, or a
soap bubble.
selfcheck D
1. Color corresponds to wavelength of light waves. Is it possible to
choose a thickness for an optical coating that will produce destructive
interference for all colors of light?
2. How can you explain the rainbow colors on the soap bubble in ﬁgure
n? Answer, p. 100
Discussion Questions
A Is it possible to get complete destructive interference in an optical
coating, at least for light of one speciﬁc wavelength?
B Sunlight consists of sinusoidal wavetrains containing on the order
of a hundred cycles backtoback, for a length of something like a tenth of
a millimeter. What happens if you try to make an optical coating thicker
than this?
C Suppose you take two microscope slides and lay one on top of the
other so that one of its edges is resting on the corresponding edge of the
bottom one. If you insert a sliver of paper or a hair at the opposite end,
a wedgeshaped layer of air will exist in the middle, with a thickness that
changes gradually from one end to the other. What would you expect to
see if the slides were illuminated from above by light of a single color?
How would this change if you gradually lifted the lower edge of the top
slide until the two slides were ﬁnally parallel?
D An observation like the one described in the previous discussion
question was used by Newton as evidence against the wave theory of
light! If Newton didn’t know about inverting and noninverting reﬂections,
what would have seemed inexplicable to him about the region where the
air layer had zero or nearly zero thickness?
Section 4.3 Interference Effects 87
o / We model a guitar string
attached to the guitar’s body at
both ends as a lightweight string
attached to extremely heavy
strings at its ends.
p / The motion of a pulse on
the string.
4.4 Waves Bounded on Both Sides
In the examples discussed in section 4.3, it was theoretically true
that a pulse would be trapped permanently in the middle medium,
but that pulse was not central to our discussion, and in any case it
was weakening severely with each partial reﬂection. Now consider
a guitar string. At its ends it is tied to the body of the instrument
itself, and since the body is very massive, the behavior of the waves
when they reach the end of the string can be understood in the
same way as if the actual guitar string was attached on the ends to
strings that were extremely massive. Reﬂections are most intense
when the two media are very dissimilar. Because the wave speed in
the body is so radically diﬀerent from the speed in the string, we
should expect nearly 100% reﬂection.
Although this may seem like a rather bizarre physical model of
the actual guitar string, it already tells us something interesting
about the behavior of a guitar that we would not otherwise have
understood. The body, far from being a passive frame for attaching
the strings to, is actually the exit path for the wave energy in the
strings. With every reﬂection, the wave pattern on the string loses
a tiny fraction of its energy, which is then conducted through the
body and out into the air. (The string has too little crosssection to
make sound waves eﬃciently by itself.) By changing the properties
of the body, moreover, we should expect to have an eﬀect on the
manner in which sound escapes from the instrument. This is clearly
demonstrated by the electric guitar, which has an extremely massive,
solid wooden body. Here the dissimilarity between the two wave
media is even more pronounced, with the result that wave energy
leaks out of the string even more slowly. This is why an electric
guitar with no electric pickup can hardly be heard at all, and it is
also the reason why notes on an electric guitar can be sustained for
longer than notes on an acoustic guitar.
If we initially create a disturbance on a guitar string, how will
the reﬂections behave? In reality, the ﬁnger or pick will give the
string a triangular shape before letting it go, and we may think of
this triangular shape as a very broad “dent” in the string which
will spread out in both directions. For simplicity, however, let’s just
imagine a wave pattern that initially consists of a single, narrow
pulse traveling up the neck, p/1. After reﬂection from the top end,
it is inverted, 3. Now something interesting happens: ﬁgure 5 is
identical to ﬁgure 1. After two reﬂections, the pulse has been in
verted twice and has changed direction twice. It is now back where
it started. The motion is periodic. This is why a guitar produces
sounds that have a deﬁnite sensation of pitch.
selfcheck E
Notice that from p/1 to p/5, the pulse has passed by every point on the
string exactly twice. This means that the total distance it has traveled
88 Chapter 4 Bounded Waves
q / A tricky way to double the
frequency.
r / Using the sum of four sine
waves to approximate the trian
gular initial shape of a plucked
guitar string.
equals 2L, where L is the length of the string. Given this fact, what are
the period and frequency of the sound it produces, expressed in terms
of L and v, the velocity of the wave? Answer, p. 101
Note that if the waves on the string obey the principle of super
position, then the velocity must be independent of amplitude, and
the guitar will produce the same pitch regardless of whether it is
played loudly or softly. In reality, waves on a string obey the prin
ciple of superposition approximately, but not exactly. The guitar,
like just about any acoustic instrument, is a little out of tune when
played loudly. (The eﬀect is more pronounced for wind instruments
than for strings, but wind players are able to compensate for it.)
Now there is only one hole in our reasoning. Suppose we some
how arrange to have an initial setup consisting of two identical pulses
heading toward each other, as in ﬁgure q. They will pass through
each other, undergo a single inverting reﬂection, and come back to
a conﬁguration in which their positions have been exactly inter
changed. This means that the period of vibration is half as long.
The frequency is twice as high.
This might seem like a purely academic possibility, since nobody
actually plays the guitar with two picks at once! But in fact it is an
example of a very general fact about waves that are bounded on both
sides. A mathematical theorem called Fourier’s theorem states that
any wave can be created by superposing sine waves. Figure r shows
how even by using only four sine waves with appropriately chosen
amplitudes, we can arrive at a sum which is a decent approximation
to the realistic triangular shape of a guitar string being plucked.
The onehump wave, in which half a wavelength ﬁts on the string,
will behave like the single pulse we originally discussed. We call
its frequency f
o
. The twohump wave, with one whole wavelength,
is very much like the twopulse example. For the reasons discussed
above, its frequency is 2f
o
. Similarly, the threehump and fourhump
waves have frequencies of 3f
o
and 4f
o
.
Theoretically we would need to add together inﬁnitely many
such wave patterns to describe the initial triangular shape of the
string exactly, although the amplitudes required for the very high
frequency parts would be very small, and an excellent approximation
could be achieved with as few as ten waves.
We thus arrive at the following very general conclusion. When
ever a wave pattern exists in a medium bounded on both sides by
media in which the wave speed is very diﬀerent, the motion can be
broken down into the motion of a (theoretically inﬁnite) series of sine
waves, with frequencies f
o
, 2f
o
, 3f
o
, ... Except for some technical
details, to be discussed below, this analysis applies to a vast range of
soundproducing systems, including the air column within the hu
man vocal tract. Because sounds composed of this kind of pattern
of frequencies are so common, our earbrain system has evolved so
Section 4.4 Waves Bounded on Both Sides 89
s / Graphs of loudness ver
sus frequency for the vowel “ah,”
sung as three different musical
notes. G is consonant with D,
since every overtone of G that is
close to an overtone of D (*) is at
exactly the same frequency. G
and C# are dissonant together,
since some of the overtones of G
(x) are close to, but not right on
top of, those of C#.
as to perceive them as a single, fused sensation of tone.
Musical applications
Many musicians claim to be able to pick out by ear several of the
frequencies 2f
o
, 3f
o
, ..., called overtones or harmonics of the funda
mental f
o
, but they are kidding themselves. In reality, the overtone
series has two important roles in music, neither of which depends
on this ﬁctitious ability to “hear out” the individual overtones.
First, the relative strengths of the overtones is an important
part of the personality of a sound, called its timbre (rhymes with
“amber”). The characteristic tone of the brass instruments, for ex
ample, is a sound that starts out with a very strong harmonic series
extending up to very high frequencies, but whose higher harmonics
die down drastically as the attack changes to the sustained portion
of the note.
Second, although the ear cannot separate the individual harmon
ics of a single musical tone, it is very sensitive to clashes between
the overtones of notes played simultaneously, i.e., in harmony. We
tend to perceive a combination of notes as being dissonant if they
have overtones that are close but not the same. Roughly speaking,
strong overtones whose frequencies diﬀer by more than 1% and less
than 10% cause the notes to sound dissonant. It is important to
realize that the term “dissonance” is not a negative one in music.
No matter how long you search the radio dial, you will never hear
more than three seconds of music without at least one dissonant
combination of notes. Dissonance is a necessary ingredient in the
creation of a musical cycle of tension and release. Musically knowl
edgeable people don’t use the word “dissonant” as a criticism of
music, although dissonance can be used in a clumsy way, or without
providing any contrast between dissonance and consonance.
90 Chapter 4 Bounded Waves
u / Example 7.
t / Standing waves on a spring.
Standing waves
Figure t shows sinusoidal wave patterns made by shaking a rope.
I used to enjoy doing this at the bank with the pens on chains, back
in the days when people actually went to the bank. You might think
that I and the person in the photos had to practice for a long time
in order to get such nice sine waves. In fact, a sine wave is the only
shape that can create this kind of wave pattern, called a standing
wave, which simply vibrates back and forth in one place without
moving. The sine wave just creates itself automatically when you
ﬁnd the right frequency, because no other shape is possible.
Harmonics on string instruments example 7
Figure u shows a violist playing what string players refer to as a natural
harmonic. The term “harmonic” is used here in a somewhat different
sense than in physics. The musician’s pinkie is pressing very lightly
against the string —not hard enough to make it touch the ﬁngerboard —
at a point precisely at the center of the string’s length. As shown in the
diagram, this allows the string to vibrate at frequencies 2f
o
, 4f
o
, 6f
o
, . . .,
which have stationary points at the center of the string, but not at the
odd multiples f
o
, 3f
o
, . . .. Since all the overtones are multiples of 2f
o
,
the ear perceives 2f
o
as the basic frequency of the note. In musical
terms, doubling the frequency corresponds to raising the pitch by an
octave. The technique can be used in order to make it easier to play
high notes in rapid passages, or for its own sake, because of the change
in timbre.
If you think about it, it’s not even obvious that sine waves should
Section 4.4 Waves Bounded on Both Sides 91
v / Sine waves add to make
sine waves. Other functions don’t
have this property.
w / Surprisingly, sound waves
undergo partial reﬂection at the
open ends of tubes as well as
closed ones.
be able to do this trick. After all, waves are supposed to travel at a
set speed, aren’t they? The speed isn’t supposed to be zero! Well, we
can actually think of a standing wave as a superposition of a moving
sine wave with its own reﬂection, which is moving the opposite way.
Sine waves have the unique mathematical property that the sum of
sine waves of equal wavelength is simply a new sine wave with the
same wavelength. As the two sine waves go back and forth, they
always cancel perfectly at the ends, and their sum appears to stand
still.
Standing wave patterns are rather important, since atoms are
really standingwave patterns of electron waves. You are a standing
wave!
Standingwave patterns of air columns
The air column inside a wind instrument behaves very much
like the waveonastring example we’ve been concentrating on so
far, the main diﬀerence being that we may have either inverting or
noninverting reﬂections at the ends.
Inverting reﬂection at one end and noninverting at the other
Some organ pipes are closed at both ends. The speed of sound
is diﬀerent in metal than in air, so there is a strong reﬂection at
the closed ends, and we can have standing waves. These reﬂections
are both densitynoninverting, so we get symmetric standingwave
patterns, such as the one shown in ﬁgure x/1.
Figure w shows the sound waves in and around a bamboo Japanese
ﬂute called a shakuhachi, which is open at both ends of the air col
umn. We can only have a standing wave pattern if there are re
ﬂections at the ends, but that is very counterintuitive — why is
there any reﬂection at all, if the sound wave is free to emerge into
open space, and there is no change in medium? Recall the reason
why we got reﬂections at a change in medium: because the wave
length changes, so the wave has to readjust itself from one pattern
to another, and the only way it can do that without developing a
kink is if there is a reﬂection. Something similar is happening here.
The only diﬀerence is that the wave is adjusting from being a plane
wave to being a spherical wave. The reﬂections at the open ends
are densityinverting, x/2, so the wave pattern is pinched oﬀ at the
ends. Comparing panels 1 and 2 of the ﬁgure, we see that although
the wave pattens are diﬀerent, in both cases the wavelength is the
same: in the lowestfrequency standing wave, half a wavelength ﬁts
inside the tube. Thus, it isn’t necessary to memorize which type of
reﬂection is inverting and which is inverting. It’s only necessary to
know that the tubes are symmetric.
Finally, we can have an asymmetric tube: closed at one end and
open at the other. A common example is the concert ﬂute, y. The
standing wave with the lowest frequency is therefore one in which
92 Chapter 4 Bounded Waves
x / Graphs of excess density
versus position for the lowest
frequency standing waves of
three types of air columns. Points
on the axis have normal air
density.
y / A concert ﬂute is an asymmet
ric air column, open at one end
and closed at the other.
1/4 of a wavelength ﬁts along the length of the tube, as shown in
ﬁgure x//3.
Both ends the same
If both ends are open (as in the ﬂute) or both ends closed (as in
some organ pipes), then the standing wave pattern must be symmet
ric. The lowestfrequency wave ﬁts half a wavelength in the tube,
x/23.
selfcheck F
Draw a graph of pressure versus position for the ﬁrst overtone of the air
column in a tube open at one end and closed at the other. This will be
the nexttolongest possible wavelength that allows for a point of maxi
mum vibration at one end and a point of no vibration at the other. How
many times shorter will its wavelength be compared to the frequency
of the lowestfrequency standing wave, shown in the ﬁgure? Based on
this, how many times greater will its frequency be? Answer, p. 101
Section 4.4 Waves Bounded on Both Sides 93
Summary
Selected Vocabulary
reﬂection . . . . . the bouncing back of part of a wave from a
boundary
transmission . . . the continuation of part of a wave through a
boundary
absorption . . . . the gradual conversion of wave energy into
heating of the medium
standing wave . . a wave pattern that stays in one place
Notation
λ . . . . . . . . . . wavelength (Greek letter lambda)
Summary
Whenever a wave encounters the boundary between two media
in which its speeds are diﬀerent, part of the wave is reﬂected and
part is transmitted. The reﬂection is always reversed fronttoback,
but may also be inverted in amplitude. Whether the reﬂection is
inverted depends on how the wave speeds in the two media compare,
e.g., a wave on a string is uninverted when it is reﬂected back into a
segment of string where its speed is lower. The greater the diﬀerence
in wave speed between the two media, the greater the fraction of
the wave energy that is reﬂected. Surprisingly, a wave in a dense
material like wood will be strongly reﬂected back into the wood at
a woodair boundary.
A onedimensional wave conﬁned by highly reﬂective boundaries
on two sides will display motion which is periodic. For example, if
both reﬂections are inverting, the wave will have a period equal
to twice the time required to traverse the region, or to that time
divided by an integer. An important special case is a sinusoidal
wave; in this case, the wave forms a stationary pattern composed of
a superposition of sine waves moving in opposite direction.
94 Chapter 4 Bounded Waves
C 261.6 Hz
D 293.7
E 329.6
F 349.2
G 392.0
A 440.0
B 466.2
Problem 5.
Problems
Key
√
A computerized answer check is available online.
_
A problem that requires calculus.
A diﬃcult problem.
1 Light travels faster in warmer air. Use this fact to explain the
formation of a mirage appearing like the shiny surface of a pool of
water when there is a layer of hot air above a road. (For simplicity,
pretend that there is actually a sharp boundary between the hot
layer and the cooler layer above it.)
2 (a) Using the equations from optional section 4.2, compute
the amplitude of light that is reﬂected back into air at an airwater
interface, relative to the amplitude of the incident wave. The speeds
of light in air and water are 3.0×10
8
and 2.2×10
8
m/s, respectively.
(b) Find the energy of the reﬂected wave as a fraction of the incident
energy. [Hint: The answers to the two parts are not the same.]
√
3 A Bﬂat clarinet (the most common kind) produces its lowest
note, at about 230 Hz, when half of a wavelength ﬁts inside its tube.
Compute the length of the clarinet. [Check: The actual length of a
clarinet is about 67 cm from the tip of the mouthpiece to the end
of the bell. Because the behavior of the clarinet and its coupling
to air outside it is a little more complex than that of a simple tube
enclosing a cylindrical air column, your answer will be close to this
value, but not exactly equal to it.]
4 (a) A good tenor saxophone player can play all of the following
notes without changing her ﬁngering, simply by altering the tight
ness of her lips: E (150 Hz), E (300 Hz), B (450 Hz), and E
(600 Hz). How is this possible? (b) Some saxophone players are
known for their ability to use this technique to play “freak notes,”
i.e., notes above the normal range of the instrument. Why isn’t it
possible to play notes below the normal range using this technique?
5 The table gives the frequencies of the notes that make up
the key of F major, starting from middle C and going up through
all seven notes. (a) Calculate the ﬁrst ﬁve or six harmonics of C
and G, and determine whether these two notes will be consonant or
dissonant. (b) Do the same for C and B. [Hint: Remember that
harmonics that diﬀer by about 110% cause dissonance.]
6 Brass and wind instruments go up in pitch as the musician
warms up. Suppose a particular trumpet’s frequency goes up by
1.2%. Let’s consider possible physical reasons for the change in
pitch. (a) Solids generally expand with increasing temperature, be
cause the stronger random motion of the atoms tends to bump them
apart. Brass expands by 1.88 ×10
−5
per degree C. Would this tend
Problems 95
to raise the pitch, or lower it? Estimate the size of the eﬀect in
comparison with the observed change in frequency. (b) The speed
of sound in a gas is proportional to the square root of the absolute
temperature, where zero absolute temperature is 273 degrees C. As
in part a, analyze the size and direction of the eﬀect. (c) Determine
the change in temperature, in units of degrees C, that would account
for the observed eﬀect.
7 Your exhaled breath contains about 4.5% carbon dioxide, and
is therefore more dense than fresh air by about 2.3%. By analogy
with the treatment of waves on a string in section 3.2, we expect
that the speed of sound will be inversely proportional to the square
root of the density of the gas. Calculate the eﬀect on the frequency
produced by a wind instrument.
96 Chapter 4 Bounded Waves
Appendix 1: Exercises
Exercise 1A: Vibrations
Equipment:
• air track and carts of two diﬀerent masses
• springs
• spring scales
Place the cart on the air track and attach springs so that it can vibrate.
1. Test whether the period of vibration depends on amplitude. Try at least two moderate
amplitudes, for which the springs do not go slack, and at least one amplitude that is large
enough so that they do go slack.
2. Try a cart with a diﬀerent mass. Does the period change by the expected factor, based on
the equation T = 2π
_
m/k?
3. Use a spring scale to pull the cart away from equilibrium, and make a graph of force versus
position. Is it linear? If so, what is its slope?
4. Test the equation T = 2π
_
m/k numerically.
Exercise 2A: Worksheet on Resonance
1. Compare the oscillator’s energies at A, B, C, and D.
2. Compare the Q values of the two oscillators.
3. Match the xt graphs in #2 with the amplitudefrequency graphs below.
98 Appendix 1: Exercises
Appendix 2: Photo Credits
Except as speciﬁcally noted below or in a parenthetical credit in the caption of a ﬁgure, all the illustrations in
this book are under my own copyright, and are copyleft licensed under the same license as the rest of the book.
In some cases it’s clear from the date that the ﬁgure is public domain, but I don’t know the name of the artist
or photographer; I would be grateful to anyone who could help me to give proper credit. I have assumed that
images that come from U.S. government web pages are copyrightfree, since products of federal agencies fall into
the public domain. I’ve included some publicdomain paintings; photographic reproductions of them are not
copyrightable in the U.S. (Bridgeman Art Library, Ltd. v. Corel Corp., 36 F. Supp. 2d 191, S.D.N.Y. 1999).
When “PSSC Physics” is given as a credit, it indicates that the ﬁgure is from the ﬁrst edition of the textbook
entitled Physics, by the Physical Science Study Committee. The early editions of these books never had their
copyrights renewed, and are now therefore in the public domain. There is also a blanket permission given in
the later PSSC College Physics edition, which states on the copyright page that “The materials taken from the
original and second editions and the Advanced Topics of PSSC PHYSICS included in this text will be available
to all publishers for use in English after December 31, 1970, and in translations after December 31, 1975.”
Credits to Millikan and Gale refer to the textbooks Practical Physics (1920) and Elements of Physics (1927).
Both are public domain. (The 1927 version did not have its copyright renewed.) Since is possible that some of
the illustrations in the 1927 version had their copyrights renewed and are still under copyright, I have only used
them when it was clear that they were originally taken from public domain sources.
In a few cases, I have made use of images under the fair use doctrine. However, I am not a lawyer, and the laws
on fair use are vague, so you should not assume that it’s legal for you to use these images. In particular, fair use
law may give you less leeway than it gives me, because I’m using the images for educational purposes, and giving
the book away for free. Likewise, if the photo credit says “courtesy of ...,” that means the copyright owner gave
me permission to use it, but that doesn’t mean you have permission to use it.
Contents Bridge, MRI, surfer, xray, galaxy: see below. 21 Jupiter: Uncopyrighted image from the Voyager
probe. Line art by the author. 25 Tacoma Narrows Bridge: Public domain, from Stillman Fires Collec
tion: Tacoma Fire Dept, www.archive.org. 33 Nimitz Freeway: Unknown photographer, courtesy of the UC
Berkeley Earth Sciences and Map Library. 37 Twodimensional MRI: Image of the author’s wife. 37 Three
dimensional brain: R. Malladi, LBNL. 44 Spider oscillations: Emile, Le Floch, and Vollrath, Nature 440:621
(2006). ?? Painting of waves: Katsushika Hokusai (17601849), public domain. 50 Superposition of pulses:
Photo from PSSC Physics. 51 Marker on spring as pulse passes by: PSSC Physics. 52 Surﬁng (hand drag):
Stan Shebs, GFDL licensed (Wikimedia Commons). 62 Fetus: Image of the author’s daughter. 52 Breaking
wave: Ole Kils, olekils at web.de, GFDL licensed (Wikipedia). 61 Wavelengths of circular and linear waves:
PSSC Physics. 62 Changing wavelength: PSSC Physics. 65 Doppler eﬀect for water waves: PSSC Physics.
66 Doppler radar: Public domain image by NOAA, an agency of the U.S. federal government. 67 M51 galaxy:
public domain Hubble Space Telescope image, courtesy of NASA, ESA, S. Beckwith (STScI), and The Hubble
Heritage Team (STScI/AURA). 68 Mount Wilson: Andrew Dunn, ccbysa licensed. 69 X15: NASA, public
domain. 69 Jet breaking the sound barrier: Public domain product of the U.S. government, U.S. Navy photo
by Ensign John Gay. 75 Human crosssection: Courtesy of the Visible Human Project, National Library of
Medicine, US NIH. 76 Reﬂection of ﬁsh: Jan Derk, Wikipedia user janderk, public domain. 77 Reﬂection of
circular waves: PSSC Physics. 77 Reﬂection of pulses: PSSC Physics. 78 Reﬂection of pulses: Photo from
PSSC Physics. 80 Xray image of hand: 1896 image produced by Roentgen. 88 Photo of guitar: Wikimedia
Commons, dedicated to the public domain by user Tsca. 91 Standing waves: PSSC Physics. 93 Flute:
Wikipedia user Grendelkhan, GFDL licensed.
Appendix 3: Hints and Solutions
Answers to SelfChecks
Answers to SelfChecks for Chapter 2
Page 29, selfcheck A: The horizontal axis is a time axis, and the period of the vibrations is
independent of amplitude. Shrinking the amplitude does not make the cyles and faster.
Page 30, selfcheck B: Energy is proportional to the square of the amplitude, so its energy is
four times smaller after every cycle. It loses three quarters of its energy with each cycle.
Page 35, selfcheck C: She should tap the wine glasses she ﬁnds in the store and look for one
with a high Q, i.e., one whose vibrations die out very slowly. The one with the highest Q will
have the highestamplitude response to her driving force, making it more likely to break.
Answers to SelfChecks for Chapter 3
Page 51, selfcheck A: The leading edge is moving up, the trailing edge is moving down, and
the top of the hump is motionless for one instant.
Answers to SelfChecks for Chapter 3
Page 77, selfcheck A: The energy of a wave is usually proportional to the square of its
amplitude. Squaring a negative number gives a positive result, so the energy is the same.
Page 77, selfcheck B: A substance is invisible to sonar if the speed of sound waves in it is
the same as in water. Reﬂections only occur at boundaries between media in which the wave
speed is diﬀerent.
Answers to SelfChecks for Chapter 4
Page 79, selfcheck C: No. A material object that loses kinetic energy slows down, but a
wave is not a material object. The velocity of a wave ordinarily only depends on the medium,
not the amplitude. The speed of a soft sound, for example, is the same as the speed of a loud
sound.
Page 87, selfcheck D: 1. No. To get the best possible interference, the thickness of the
coating must be such that the second reﬂected wave train lags behind the ﬁrst by an integer
number of wavelengths. Optimal performance can therefore only be produced for one speciﬁc
color of light. The typical greenish color of the coatings shows that they do the worst job for
green light.
2. Light can be reﬂected either from the outer surface of the ﬁlm or from the inner surface, and
there can be either constructive or destructive interference between the two reﬂections. We see
a pattern that varies across the surface because its thickness isn’t constant. We see rainbow
colors because the condition for destructive or constructive interference depends on wavelength.
White light is a mixture of all the colors of the rainbow, and at a particular place on the soap
bubble, part of that mixture, say red, may be reﬂected strongly, while another part, blue for
example, is almost entirely transmitted.
Page 88, selfcheck E: The period is the time required to travel a distance 2L at speed v,
T = 2L/v. The frequency is f = 1/T = v/2L.
Page 93, selfcheck F: The wave pattern will look like this: . Three quarters of a
wavelength ﬁt in the tube, so the wavelength is three times shorter than that of the lowest
frequency mode, in which one quarter of a wave ﬁts. Since the wavelength is smaller by a factor
of three, the frequency is three times higher. Instead of f
o
, 2f
o
, 3f
o
, 4f
o
, . . ., the pattern of wave
frequencies of this air column goes f
o
, 3f
o
, 5f
o
, 7f
o
, . . .
101
Index
absorption of waves, 79
amplitude
deﬁned, 16
peaktopeak, 16
related to energy, 27
comet, 13
damping
deﬁned, 29
decibel scale, 28
Doppler eﬀect, 65
driving force, 31
eardrum, 31
Einstein, Albert, 14
energy
related to amplitude, 27
exponential decay
deﬁned, 29
Fourier’s theorem, 89
frequency
deﬁned, 15
fundamental, 90
Galileo, 19
Halley’s Comet, 13
harmonics, 90
Hooke’s law, 18
interference eﬀects, 86
light, 58
motion
periodic, 15
overtones, 90
period
deﬁned, 15
pitch, 13
principle of superposition, 49
pulse
deﬁned, 49
quality factor
deﬁned, 30
reﬂection of waves, 76
resonance
deﬁned, 33
simple harmonic motion
deﬁned, 18
period of, 18
sound, 58
speed of, 52
standing wave, 91
steadystate behavior, 31
swing, 31
timbre, 90
tuning fork, 17
work
done by a varying force, 15, 17, 20
Index 103
104 Index
Index 105
Useful Data
Metric Preﬁxes
M mega 10
6
k kilo 10
3
m milli 10
−3
µ (Greek mu) micro 10
−6
n nano 10
−9
p pico 10
−12
f femto 10
−15
(Centi, 10
−2
, is used only in the centimeter.)
The Greek Alphabet
α A alpha ν N nu
β B beta ξ Ξ xi
γ Γ gamma o O omicron
δ ∆ delta π Π pi
E epsilon ρ P rho
ζ Z zeta σ Σ sigma
η H eta τ T tau
θ Θ theta υ Y upsilon
ι I iota φ Φ phi
κ K kappa χ X chi
λ Λ lambda ψ Ψ psi
µ M mu ω Ω omega
Speeds of Light and
Sound
speed of light c = 3.00 ×10
8
m/s
speed of sound c = 340 m/s
Subatomic Particles
particle mass (kg) radius (fm)
electron 9.109 ×10
−31
0.01
proton 1.673 ×10
−27
∼ 1.1
neutron 1.675 ×10
−27
∼ 1.1
The radii of protons and neutrons can only be given approx
imately, since they have fuzzy surfaces. For comparison, a
typical atom is about a million fm in radius.
Notation and Units
quantity unit symbol
distance meter, m x, ∆x
time second, s t, ∆t
mass kilogram, kg m
density kg/m
3
ρ
velocity m/s v
acceleration m/s
2
a
gravitational ﬁeld J/kg·m or m/s
2
g
force newton, 1 N=1 kg·m/s
2
F
pressure 1 Pa=1 N/m
2
P
energy joule, J E
power watt, 1 W = 1 J/s P
amplitude (varies) A
period s T
frequency Hz f
wavelength m λ
quality factor unitless Q
FWHM Hz FWHM
Conversions
Nonmetric units in terms of metric ones:
1 inch = 25.4 mm (by deﬁnition)
1 poundforce = 4.5 newtons of force
(1 kg) · g = 2.2 poundsforce
1 scientiﬁc calorie = 4.18 J
1 kcal = 4.18 ×10
3
J
1 gallon = 3.78 ×10
3
cm
3
1 horsepower = 746 W
When speaking of food energy, the word “Calorie” is used
to mean 1 kcal, i.e., 1000 calories. In writing, the capital C
may be used to indicate 1 Calorie=1000 calories.
Relationships among U.S. units:
1 foot (ft) = 12 inches
1 yard (yd) = 3 feet
1 mile (mi) = 5280 feet
Earth, Moon, and Sun
body mass (kg) radius (km) radius of orbit (km)
earth 5.97 ×10
24
6.4 ×10
3
1.49 ×10
8
moon 7.35 ×10
22
1.7 ×10
3
3.84 ×10
5
sun 1.99 ×10
30
7.0 ×10
5
—
106 Index
The Light and Matter series of introductory physics textbooks: 1 2 3 4 5 6 Newtonian Physics Conservation Laws Vibrations and Waves Electricity and Magnetism Optics The Modern Revolution in Physics .
lightandmatter.com .Benjamin Crowell www.
0. except for those photographs and drawings of which I am not the author. California www.lightandmatter. you may also copy this book under the GNU Free Documentation License version 1.Fullerton. 8th December 2006 This book is licensed under the Creative Commons AttributionShareAlike license. ISBN 0970467036 .com copyright 19982005 Benjamin Crowell edition 2. At your option. no frontcover texts.com.0/. If you agree to the license. version 1. such as the right to copy the book. http://www. with no invariant sections. it grants you certain privileges that you would not otherwise have.gnu.lightandmatter.2. or download the digital version free of charge from www. and no backcover texts.org/licenses/bysa/1. as listed in the photo credits.txt.2 rev.org/licenses/fdl. http://creativecommons.
To Diz and Bird. .
.
Brief Contents 1 2 3 4 Vibrations 13 Resonance 25 Free Waves 47 Bounded Waves 75 .
17. . .3 Proofs . . . and Amplitude .—3. . . .4 Proofs . 60. . . 49. . .—What the big bang is not. 2. . 53.—Sinusoidal waves. . .4 Periodic Waves . 68. .—Graphs of waves as a function of position. . . . . . The Big Bang. . .—2. 65 Summary . . . . . . . . . . . .—Period is approximately independent of amplitude.5 The Doppler Effect . 18. . . if the amplitude is small. 60 3. 2. . . . . . .—Wavelength. . 40. . . Frequency. . Period and frequency of a periodic wave. A wave’s velocity depends on the medium. 54 3. . . . 58.2 Simple Harmonic Motion . 49 3. 15 17 1. Statement 2: maximum amplitude at resonance. . . . Why are sinewave vibrations so common?. . . . 52.—Light waves. . 60. .—Wave patterns. 56. .—Approximate treatment. 70 10 . . . . . .1 Wave Motion .. . . Intuitive ideas. . . 67.Contents 1 Vibrations 1. . .3 Putting Energy Into Vibrations . . 51. 20 22 23 Summary . .— Statement 4: FWHM related to Q. Sound waves. 54. .1 Energy in Vibrations . . . . . .. . . . . . . .2 Waves on a String . . . . . . . . . 1. . . . . . . 63. . . 2.—Rigorous derivation using calculus (optional). . . 61. . . 58 2 Resonance 2. . Problems . 61. 1. .3 Sound and Light Waves . 59 26 29 31 39 Summary . . Superposition. 40. . . 41 43 . . . . . . . . . . .2 Energy Lost From Vibrations . . . .—Wave velocity related to frequency and wavelength. . 3 Free Waves 3. . . 55. . .1 Period. Problems . . The medium is not transported with the wave. 3. .—Statement 3: amplitude at resonance proportional to Q. . . 40..
4. . . . . .—Standingwave patterns of air columns. . . . Transmission. . . 90. 76. 4. 91. . .—Intensity of reﬂection. . .1 Reﬂection. 4.— Inverted and uninverted reﬂections. . . . . 84. 79. . . Musical applications. 94 95 Appendix 1: Exercises 97 Appendix 2: Photo Credits 99 Appendix 3: Hints and Solutions 100 4 Bounded Waves 4. . . . 72 waves. . . 78. . .— Absorption. . . Summary .Problems . Problems . .—Inverted and uninverted reﬂections in general. . . . . . and Absorption .2 Quantitative Treatment of Reﬂection 82 Why reﬂection occurs. . . . 83.—Standing 86 88 11 . 82. . .4 Waves Bounded on Both Sides . . . . . . . . . 92. 76 Reﬂection and transmission. . . . .3 Interference Effects . . . .
12 .
so that we can judge colors and pitches by the rate of repetition. Ancient cultures tended to attribute repetitious phenomena 13 .The vibrations of this electric bass string are converted to electrical vibrations. Our mental category of “dandelionness” is strongly linked to the color of light waves that vibrate about half a million billion times a second: yellow. then to sound vibrations. but in addition those vibrations will often be repetitive. Granting that we do sometimes encounter nonrepeating waves such as the consonant “sh. Evolution has designed our two most important senses around the assumption that not only will our environment be drenched with informationbearing vibrations. from the orbits of electrons in atoms to the reappearance of Halley’s Comet every 75 years. The velvety throb of a cello has as its most obvious characteristic a relatively low musical pitch — the note you are spontaneously imagining right now might be one whose sound vibrations repeat at a rate of a hundred times a second.” which has no recognizable pitch. the most prominent of which have to do with vibrations. Cello. Chapter 1 Vibrations Dandelion. Read those two words. and your brain instantly conjures a stream of associations. and ﬁnally to vibrations of our eardrums. why was Nature’s assumption of repetition nevertheless so right in general? Repeating phenomena occur throughout nature.
We will not be able to draw for very long without having the path cross itself. where the electrons circling the nucleus resemble — well. but we now have a less mystical explanation. A chain of discoveries initiated by Albert Einstein led to the realization that the socalled subatomic “particles” were in fact waves. conservation of energy proves that it must again have the same kinetic energy and therefore the same speed. it is vibrations and waves that are fundamental. Conservation laws. Breaking the clockwork down into smaller and smaller bits. But at such a crossing point. and the formation of matter is just one of the tricks that waves can do. the comet has returned to a place it visited once before. like the seasons to the cyclical nature of time itself. But it goes deeper than that. it no longer seems surprising that it does. it will inevitably end up crossing itself. 14 Chapter 1 Vibrations . Although this falls short of being an ironclad proof that the comet’s orbit must repeat. In this new worldview. Suppose that instead of Halley’s Comet’s true. repeating elliptical orbit that closes seamlessly upon itself with each revolution. But at the beginning of the 20th century. I have been indoctrinating you with a mechanistic vision of the universe as a giant piece of clockwork. we decide to take a pen and draw a whimsical alternative path that never repeats. Up to this point in your study of physics. then.a / If we try to draw a nonrepeating orbit for Halley’s Comet. but the comet’s direction of motion cannot be randomly chosen. we end up at the atomic level. particles of matter are the fundamental building blocks of everything. because angular momentum must be conserved as well. little clocks! From this point of view. and since its potential energy is the same as it was on the last visit. and vibrations and waves are just a couple of the tricks that groups of particles can do. provide us with a good reason why repetitive motion is so prevalent in the universe. the tabled were turned. Not only that.
It can be stretched. When the block comes back to its initial position again. the rube is supposed to push the bowling ball on the track just hard enough so that it goes over the hump and into the valley. and Amplitude 15 . they are reciprocals of each other. though. however.1.1 Period. but there is no way to get the ball into that motion beginning from the place where we start. Since the period is the number of seconds per cycle and the frequency is the number of cycles per second. 1. Frequency. The motion has gone through one complete cycle. 7. With no forces on it. or compressed. this is impossible. a quantity called the frequency. going to the left on its way into the valley. 2. The motion that the customer hopes for is physically impossible. and can be stretched. We are used to referring to shortperiod sound vibrations as “high” in pitch. but does not come back out again. at 10. A mass attached to the spring can be set into motion initially. c / Example 1. it oscillates as shown in the series of snapshots. Frequency. The usual physics terminology for motion that repeats itself over and over is periodic motion. Suppose you expect the ball to come back to a point such as the one shown with the dashed outline. T . the spring assumes its equilibrium length. then stop and turn around. 4.) One complete repetition of the motion is called a cycle. and it sounds odd to have to say that high pitches have low periods. 4. you can create enough kinetic friction so that a signiﬁcant amount of heat is generated. and will then vibrate. 3. If we assume that the mass slides back and forth without friction and that the motion is onedimensional. so it must have the same kinetic energy again. it returns to its initial position with the same kinetic energy and the same direction of motion. There is a physically possible periodic motion in which the ball rolls back and forth. and will now repeat forever in the absence of friction. because kinetic energy has been converted into heat. It was moving then. (The symbol P is not used because of the possible confusion with momentum. its potential energy is the same again. staying conﬁned within the valley. 413. If the only types of energy involved are kinetic and potential. f . and Amplitude Figure b shows our most basic example of a vibration. We attach the spring to a wall on the left and to a mass on the right.1 Period. Finally. 2. b/1. It would already have passed through this point once before. A carnival game example 1 In the carnival game shown in ﬁgure c. If we now hit the mass with a hammer. If you put enough spin on the ball. so conservation of energy tells us that it cannot be at rest when it comes back to the same point. 3. b / A spring has an equilibrium length. There is a way to beat the game. and the time required for one repetition is called the period. The motion is in the opposite direction. f = 1/T . It is therefore more common to discuss the rapidity of a vibration in terms of the number of vibrations per second. Section 1. 413. then conservation of energy proves that the motion must be repetitive. Conservation of energy then allows the ball to be at rest when it comes back to a point like the outlined one. or compressed.
but it would be somewhat more common in physics to use the distance from the center to one extreme. and two people discussing the same system may not even use the same deﬁnition. not a distance. This corresponds to a period of T = 1/f = 1. Units of inverse second. This example shows a second reason why we normally speak in terms of frequency rather than period: it would be painful to have to refer to such small time intervals routinely. It would have units of distance. In abbreviated form. The amplitude of the vibrations of the mass on a spring could be deﬁned in two different ways.e. reproduce the musical note on the piano. then the frequency of their motion is f = 200/1 s = 200 s−1 . d / 1. The amplitude of a child on a swing. 16 Chapter 1 Vibrations . The radio waves emitted by KKJZ’s transmitting antenna vibrate 88. 2. Units of frequency are also commonly used to specify the speeds of computers. Microcomputers these days operate at clock frequencies of about a gigahertz.. If the ﬂy’s wings ﬂap. T = 1/f = (1/200) s = 0.14 × 10−8 s . In other situations we would not even use the same units for amplitude.Period and frequency of a ﬂy’s wingbeats example 2 A Victorian parlor trick was to listen to the pitch of a ﬂy’s buzz. or a pendulum. say. and announce how many times the ﬂy’s wings had ﬂapped in one second.is mega. s−1 . millions. would most conveniently be measured as an angle. d/1.4 nanoseconds. In the example of the block on the end of the spring. This is the familiar unit used for the frequencies on the radio dial.1 MHz. We have discussed how to measure how fast something vibrates. is one cycle per second. d/2. since the extremes of the motion look like mountain peaks or upsidedown mountain peaks on a graph of position versus time. named in honor of a pioneer of radio technology. are awkward in speech.1 million times per second. The former is usually referred to as the peaktopeak amplitude. the amplitude will be measured in distance units such as cm. so an abbreviation has been created. The amplitude of a swinging pendulum would more naturally be deﬁned as an angle. The period is one 200th of a second. Frequency of a radio station example 3 KKJZ’s frequency is 88. but most people are more familiar with the big metric preﬁxes than with the small ones. The idea is that all the little circuits on a computer chip are synchronized by the very fast ticks of an electronic clock. and what period does this correspond to? The metric preﬁx M. One Hertz. 1 Hz = 1 s−1 . so that the circuits can all cooperate on a task without getting ahead or behind. 30 clock cycles. but not how big the vibrations are. say. i. I could abbreviate by telling people that KKJZ’s period was 11. The general term for this is amplitude. One could work in terms of the distance traveled by the block from the extreme left to the extreme right. Adding two numbers might require.005 s. What does this mean. 200 times in one second. The deﬁnition of amplitude depends on the system being discussed. A.
It is not hard to see intuitively why extremes of amplitude would act diﬀerently. we will ﬁnd that its x−t graph is nearly a perfect sinewave shape. we will deﬁne the origin of our coordinate system so that x equals zero at equilibrium. (We call it a “sine wave” or “sinusoidal” even if it is a cosine. The electrical vibrations in a radio receiver would be measured in electrical units such as volts or amperes. and a rightward force when it is on the left side. For convenience of notation throughout this chapter. In one dimension. as shown in ﬁgure e/1. 1.) The key to understanding how an object vibrates is to know how the force on the object depends on the object’s position. (Although we are assuming for simplicity in this chapter that energy is never dissipated. a car bouncing on its shock absorbers. If an object is vibrating to the right and left. but why is it a speciﬁc mathematically perfect shape? Why is it not a sawtooth shape like 2 or some other shape like 3? The mystery deepens as we ﬁnd that a vast number of apparently unrelated vibrating systems show the same mathematical feature. or a sine or cosine shifted by some arbitrary horizontal amount. and since the force changes from positive to negative there must be a point in the middle where the force is zero. Section 1. but if we try to double the amplitude of the vibrations the bottom of the car may begin hitting the ground. a car that is bouncing lightly on its shock absorbers may behave smoothly. A tuning fork. a sapling pulled to one side and released. e / Sinusoidal and nonsinusoidal vibrations. For example. we can represent the direction of the force using a positive or negative sign.) It may not be surprising that it is a wiggle of this general sort. so the vibrations would actually die out quite quickly.2 Simple Harmonic Motion 17 . e/4. all these systems will exhibit sinewave motion under one condition: the amplitude of the motion must be small. then it must have a leftward force on it when it is on the right side. this is clearly not a very realistic assumption in this example. This is the equilibrium point. rather than repeating for many cycles as shown in the ﬁgure. Each time the car hits the ground it will convert quite a bit of its potential and kinetic energy into heat and sound.since her feet will move a greater distance than her head. where the object would stay at rest if it was released at rest.2 Simple Harmonic Motion Why are sinewave vibrations so common? If we actually construct the massonaspring system discussed in the previous section and measure its motion accurately.
and is related to the objects displacement from equilibrium by an equation of the form F = −kx. since the force will not be able to whip a massive object back and forth very rapidly. This is because any curve looks linear from very close up. f / The force exerted by an ideal spring. if we restrict ourselves to small amplitudes. to objects ranging from vibrating stars to vibrating nuclei. We can visualize the behavior of this force using a graph of F versus x. if the amplitude is small. Period is approximately independent of amplitude. Hooke’s law is only an approximation. This is the reason why sinusoidal vibrations are a universal feature of all vibrating systems. If the vibrations were conﬁned to the region shown in g/2. The graph is a line.The simplest example is the mass on a spring. If the total force on a vibrating object depends only on the object’s position. F = −kx . but ﬁgure g shows it to be far more general than that. 18 Chapter 1 Vibrations . then the object’s motion displays a sinusoidal graph with period T = 2π m/k. A system with this F − x curve would have largeamplitude vibrations that were complex and not sinusoidal.3. If we magnify the F − x graph as shown in ﬁgure g/2. k. A sinusoidal vibration is known as simple harmonic motion. A stiﬀer spring has a larger value of k and a steeper slope. Until now we have not even mentioned the most counterintuitive aspect of the equation T = 2π m/k: it does not depend on g / Seen from close up. as shown in ﬁgure f. any F − x curve looks like a line. relates the motion graph to the force graph. A larger value of k causes a shorter period. which behaves exactly according to Hooke’s law. Figure g/1 depicts a force curve that is not a straight line. whose proof is given in optional section 1. it is not too hard to understand why the equation for the period makes sense. is equal to minus its slope. for which force on the mass is given by Hooke’s law. Even if you do not read the proof. The theorem is therefore of great general signiﬁcance. This may seem like only an obscure theorem about the massonaspring system. The following important theorem. it becomes very diﬃcult to tell that the graph is not a straight line. But the same system would exhibit sinusoidal smallamplitude vibrations. Theorem: A linear force graph makes a sinusoidal motion graph. they would be very nearly sinusoidal. It applies throughout the universe. as long as the spring isn’t compressed or stretched so much that it is permanently bent or damaged. A greater mass causes a greater period. and the spring constant. because a stronger force can whip the object back and forth more rapidly. but it works very well for most springs in real life.
the period of oscillation seemed to be the same. Even without a fancy system of pulleys to keep the pendulum’s vibrations from dying down. and a second hand. he could get very accurate time measurements. A gust of wind would now and then start one of the chandeliers in the cathedral swaying back and forth. This increases k as well as m. we might expect that a larger mass would lead to a longer period. so the period of a pendulum is independent of m. From the equation T = 2π m/k . most people would expect the massonaspring system to take longer to complete a cycle if the amplitude was larger. but both small enough that the theorem applies.amplitude at all. However. the force is greater. but within a generation the device had taken on the form that persisted for hundreds of years after. But after going home and testing a pendulum. a minute hand. and therefore accelerates the object to higher speeds. he convinced himself that he had found a superior method of measuring time. Up until that time. (We are comparing amplitudes that are diﬀerent from each other. because the gradual decrease in amplitude due to friction would have no eﬀect on the pendulum’s period.) In fact the largeramplitude vibrations take the same amount of time as the smallamplitude ones.2 Simple Harmonic Motion 19 . he had been carrying out his physics experiments with such crude timemeasuring techniques as feeling his own pulse or singing a tune to keep a musical beat.) The pendulum example 4 Compare the periods of pendula having bobs with different masses. Intuitively. Legend has it that this fact was ﬁrst noticed by Galileo during what was apparently a less than enthralling church service. increasing the mass also increases the forces that act on the pendulum: gravity and the tension in the string. (Galileo never produced a modernstyle pendulum clock with pulleys. This is because at large amplitudes. Section 1. and he noticed that regardless of the amplitude of the vibrations.
and solving for T gives the desired equation for the period. Because you are in the same horizontal plane as her motion. h / The object moves along the circle at constant speed. Fx v2 = − cos θ . we have v2 a = . Projected onto the line. the x and y components of its velocity are continuously changing. T Since everything is constant in this equation except for x.1. r The x component of the acceleration is therefore v2 ax = cos θ . r Since our goal is an equation involving the period. which in reality will only hold approximately for small x. as shown by the unequal spacing of the points when projected onto the line below. T2 The quantity r cos θ is the same as x. Finally. it is natural to eliminate the variable v = circumference/T = 2πr/T . T = 2π k Since this equation is independent of r. Circular motion viewed edgeon doesn’t just look like any kind of backandforth motion. then. T is independent of the amplitude. so m r v2 Fx = −m cos θ . and therefore that a force proportional to x gives sinusoidal motion. The idea of the proof. is to show that an object acted on by a force that varies as F = −kx has motion that is identical to circular motion projected down to one dimension. Applying Newton’s second law. because the sine and cosine functions can be deﬁned as the x and y coordinates of a point at angle θ on the unit circle. The basic idea of the proof can be understood by imagining that you are watching a child on a merrygoround from far away. it looks like motion with a sinusoidal x−t graph. we have proved that motion with force proportional to x is the same as circular motion projected onto a line. giving 4π 2 mr cos θ . r where θ is the angle measured counterclockwise from the x axis. and (3) that the period is independent of the amplitude. (2) that the period of the motion is 2π m/k. she appears to be moving from side to side along a line. Fx = − 20 Chapter 1 Vibrations . its motion is the same as that of an object experiencing a force F = −k x. For an object performing uniform circular motion. subject to the initial assumption of perfect F = −kx behavior. The equation will also fall out nicely at the end.3 Proofs In this section we prove (1) that a linear F − x graph gives sinusoidal motion. m . so we have 4π 2 m Fx = − 2 x . You may omit this section without losing the continuity of the chapter. but even though its overall speed is constant. we identify the constant factor of 4π 2 m/T 2 with k.
The moons of Jupiter.3 Proofs 21 . because it proved that not everything in the universe had to revolve around the earth as had been believed. i / Example 5. example 5 The idea behind this proof is aptly illustrated by the moons of Jupiter. Because we see the moons’ circular orbits edgeon. Section 1. Their discovery by Galileo was an epochal event in astronomy. Over this time period. but ﬁgure i shows a simulation of how Jupiter and its moons might appear at intervals of three hours through a large presentday instrument. Io. they appear to perform sinusoidal vibrations. Galileo’s telescope was of poor quality by modern standards. the innermost moon. completes half a cycle.
. . . For a spring. conservation of energy requires that an object repeat its motion. . This type of vibration is called simple harmonic motion. . A . The Greek letter ω. k. . often measured from the center to one side. . . period frequency amplitude the slope of the graph of F versus x. . . . . . where F is the total force acting on an object and x is the object’s position. is used in many books for frequency. . . In simple harmonic motion. . . Notation T . . . . . . . . . . . nu. in such a situation. . may have diﬀerent units depending on the nature of the vibration simple harmonic motion whose x − t graph is a sine wave motion . . . is often used as an abbreviation for 2πf . . . the time required for one cycle of a periodic motion frequency . . . . omega. . . the x − t graph is a sine wave.Summary Selected Vocabulary periodic motion . . . 22 Chapter 1 Vibrations . the number of cycles per second. . . . . . Not only are periodic vibrations very common. it would have to have a diﬀerent kinetic energy and therefore a diﬀerent total energy. the inverse of the period amplitude . . but smallamplitude vibrations are always sinusoidal as well. . . . ω . . . . . That is. . . . this is known as the spring constant. . Other Terminology and Notation ν . . . This is because the graph of force versus position will always look like a straight line on a suﬃciently small scale. . the amount of vibration. . The Greek letter ν. . . . Summary Periodic motion is common in the world around us because of conservation laws. . . . the period is independent of the amplitude. An important example is onedimensional motion in which the only two forms of energy involved are potential and kinetic. . . motion that repeats itself over and over period . and is given by T = 2π m/k . . because otherwise when it came back to the same point. . f .
00 N.) The frequency of the tail’s vibration is typically about 1015 Hz. FW . x0 = 1.01 m. and derive the approximate period of √ oscillation. on graph paper. A problem that requires calculus. and consider a case where the amplitude of the vibrations is very small. The upward force of the air on the piston is given by Fair = ax−1. 1 Find an equation for the frequency of simple harmonic motion in terms of k and m. explain why the vibration of the piston about equilibrium is not simple harmonic motion.02 m. assume the air only supports the weight. Draw a neat. [Hint: the total force on the bob is the same if the angles away from the bottom are the same. [Hint: Acceleration corresponds Problem 4. covering the range from x = 0.) Assume friction is negligible. and FW = −1.98 m to 1. and sketch a graph of x vs t.4 . The equilibrium position. Sketch a graph of the total force on the piston as it would appear over this wider range of motion. The piston is released from x = 1.4 . x0 . as a function of x. 5 Consider the same pneumatic piston described in problem 4. A diﬃcult problem.00 m.] (b) Based on your answer from part (a). showing roughly how the curve is diﬀerent from a sine wave. you will ﬁnd that the force is very nearly proportional to x − x0 . is where FW equals −Fair . (The most obvious example is the sperm cell. Problems 23 . For simplicity. of the piston itself.4 .Problems Key √ A computerized answer check is available online. Over this small range. Let a = 1 N · m1. Approximate the curve with a straight line. where a is a constant with funny units of N · m1. (Note that in the main text I have assumed the equilibrium position to be at x = 0. F . but now imagine that the oscillations are not small. how does the k of pendulum 2 compare with the k of pendulum 1? Give a numerical ratio. although in practice this device is used to support some other object. but equal angles do not correspond to equal values of x. 4 A pneumatic spring consists of a piston riding on top of the air in a cylinder. which they wiggle back and forth. but that is not the natural choice here. 2 Many singlecelled organisms propel themselves through water with long tails. For a wider range of motion. If we deﬁne x as the distance traveled by the bob along a circle away from the bottom. To what range of periods does this range of frequencies correspond? 3 (a) Pendulum 2 has a string twice as long as pendulum 1. how does the period of pendulum 2 compare with the period of pendulum 1? Give a numerical ratio. ﬁnd its slope. accurate graph of the total force.
(c) Find the cube’s period of oscillation as it bobs up and down in the water. if a boat is ﬂoating in water. Each spring has spring constant k. m/k has units that make 9 A hot scientiﬁc question of the 18th century was the shape of the earth: whether its radius was greater at the equator than at the poles.780 to 9.022 m/s2 eﬀect to be expected if the earth had been spherical. so if the force is greater. the force of the surrounding water would be just the right amount to hold up this new “chunk” of water. 8 Show that the equation T = 2π sense. and verify that plugging in h − h0 gives a total force of zero. or the other way around. California. (a) Show that a cube of mass m with edges of length b ﬂoating upright (not tilted) in a ﬂuid of density ρ will have a draft (depth to which it sinks below the waterline) h given at equilibrium by h0 = m/b2 ρ. This change. then the the strength of gravity would in reality be observed to vary over a range from about 9. 7 The ﬁgure shows a seesaw with two springs at Codornices Park in Berkeley.826 m/s2 . because if the boat was instantly removed and the hole in the water ﬁlled back in. (b) Find the total force on the cube when its draft is h. (b) Discuss the special case where a = b. a. and that it bulged at the equator? 24 Chapter 1 Vibrations . (a) Find the period of vibration in terms of the variables k. but also to the greater radius of the earth at the equator. Problem 7. (c) Show that your answer to part a also makes sense in the case of b = 0. m. What is the accuracy with which the period of a onesecond pendulum would have to be measured in order to prove that the earth was not a sphere. For instance. is greater than the 0.to the curvature of the x − t graph.046 m/s2 . rather than a > b as in the real seesaw. and show that can be expressed in terms of and g only. the graph should curve around more quickly. amounting to 0. The greater eﬀect occurs because the equator feels a reduction due not just to the acceleration of the spinning earth out from under it.] 6 Archimedes’ principle states that an object partly or wholly immersed in ﬂuid experiences a buoyant force equal to the weight of the ﬂuid it displaces. the upward pressure of the water (vector sum of all the forces of the water pressing inward and upward on every square inch of its hull) must be equal to the weight of the water displaced. If the highest and lowest latitudes accessible to explorers were 0 and 70 degrees. and a kid of mass m sits on each seat. and b. One method used to attack this question was to measure gravity accurately in diﬀerent locations on the earth using pendula.
with the sides vibrating 8. Middle: The bridge immediately before the collapse. the tilt became so violent that I lost control of the car.5 meters (28 feet) up and down. The righthand picture gives a sense of the massive scale of the construction. Nicknamed “Galloping Gertie.Top: A series of images from a ﬁlm of the Tacoma Narrows Bridge vibrating on the day it was to collapse. the bridge began to sway violently from side to side.. motorists began to notice its tendency to vibrate frighteningly in even a moderate wind. The following is an eyewitness report from a newspaper editor who found himself on the bridge as the vibrations approached the breaking point. Bottom: During and after the ﬁnal collapse. Chapter 2 Resonance Soon after the milelong Tacoma Narrows Bridge opened in July 1940. “Just as I drove past the towers.” the bridge collapsed in a steady 42mileperhour wind on November 7 of the same year. Note that the bridge is over a mile long. Before I realized it.. I jammed on the brakes and 25 .
I risked rising to my feet and running a few yards at a time. Toward the last. Going back to our standard example of a mass on a spring. my hands bruised and swollen from gripping the concrete curb. and the system never runs down. my knees were raw and bleeding. The reason for its collapse was not substandard materials or construction. The engineers learned their lesson and simply included some slight modiﬁcations to avoid the resonance phenomenon that spelled the doom of the ﬁrst one.” The ruins of the bridge formed an artiﬁcial reef. I saw the bridge in its ﬁnal collapse and saw my car plunge into the Narrows. nor was the bridge underdesigned: the piers were hundredfoot blocks of concrete. one of the world’s largest..) The most important thing to understand about the energy content of vibrations is that the total energy is proportional to the 26 Chapter 2 Resonance . It trades energy back and forth between kinetic and potential energy. The replacement bridge. the same eﬀect that allows an opera singer to break a wine glass with her voice and that lets you tune in the radio station you want. the girders massive and made of carbon steel. My breath was coming in gasps. not stronger..1 Energy in Vibrations One way of describing the collapse of the bridge is that the bridge kept taking energy from the steadily blowing wind and building up more and more energetic vibrations. Safely back at the toll plaza. I started to get my dog Tubby. we ﬁnd that there are two forms of energy involved: the potential energy stored in the spring and the kinetic energy of the moving mass. which has lasted half a century so far. “Around me I could hear concrete cracking. Either way. In this section.got out. so that no energy is converted to heat. We may start the system in motion either by hitting the mass to put in kinetic energy by pulling it to one side to put in potential energy. 2. I crawled 500 yards or more to the towers. and in the subsequent sections we will move on to the loss of energy and the adding of energy to a vibrating system. all with the goal of understanding the important phenomenon of resonance. only to be thrown onto my face against the curb. the subsequent behavior of the system is identical. It was not replaced for ten years. was built smarter. (We are still assuming there is no friction... “On hands and knees most of the time. but was thrown again before I could reach the car.. we discuss the energy contained in a vibration. The car itself began to slide from side to side of the roadway. The bridge was destroyed because of the physical phenomenon of resonance..
proving that energy is proportional to A2 at any point would suﬃce to prove that energy is proportional to A2 in general. and the kinetic energy. and place it in the lefthand side. so the energy is greater by a factor of 1012 . it can undergo vibrations about equilibrium. The reason for singling out these two points is merely instructive. as long as the amplitude is small. At this point it has no potential energy. Are these conclusions restricted to the massonaspring example? No. so again we ﬁnd that the energy is proportional to the square of the amplitude. This is a phenomenally large factor! a / Example 1. so by calculating its potential energy we can ﬁnd the energy of the vibration. When the mass is all the way to one side. Now consider the moment when the mass is passing through the equilibrium point at x = 0. (1/2)mv 2 . so the energy is proportional to the square of the amplitude. at rest and ready to reverse directions. The weight of this chunk of water is proportional to A. and so is the height through which it must be lifted. so the energy is proportional to A2 . and energy is proportional to the square of the amplitude. We are only studying vibrations right now. The energy of such a vibration is most easily calculated by considering the “turnaround point” when the water has stopped and is about to reverse directions. We are thus left with a very general conclusion: the energy of any vibration is approximately proportional to the square of the amplitude. We have already seen that the potential energy stored in a spring equals (1/2)kx2 . We have already seen that F = −kx is a valid approximation for any vibrating object. so we are not yet concerned with how a sound wave works. not waves. The range of energies of sound waves example 2 The amplitude of vibration of your eardrum at the threshold of pain is about 106 times greater than the amplitude with which it vibrates in response to the softest sound you can hear. This potential energy is the same as the work that would have to be done to take the water out of the righthand side down to a depth A below the equilibrium level. Water in a Utube example 1 If water is poured into a Ushaped tube as shown in the ﬁgure. it is instructive to consider two speciﬁc moments in the motion of the mass on a spring as examples. How many times greater is the energy with which your ear has to cope for the painfully loud sound. raise it through a height A. compared to the soft sound? The amplitude is 106 times greater.1 Energy in Vibrations 27 . all its energy is potential.square of the amplitude. Although the total energy is constant. it has only potential energy and no kinetic energy. since the energy is constant. but it does have kinetic energy. is proportional to the square of the velocity. The velocity is proportional to the amplitude of the motion. or how the energy gets to us through the air. At this point. provided that the amplitude is small. Note that because of the huge range of Section 2.
.energies that our ear can sense. Evolution wanted our sense of hearing to be able to encompass all these sounds without collapsing the bottom of the scale so that anything softer than the crack of doom would sound the same. it would not be reasonable to have a sense of loudness that was additive. heavy metal concert . and adding 1 unit to the decibel measurement corresponds to multiplying the energy level (or actually the power per unit area) by a certain factor. mother nature made it multiplicative. So rather than making our sense of loudness additive. 105 times more energy than the wind 1012 times more energy than the wind In terms of addition and subtraction. 28 Chapter 2 Resonance . Although a detailed discussion of the decibel scale is not relevant here. Consider. for instance. the diﬀerence between the wind and the quiet conversation is nothing compared to the diﬀerence between the quiet conversation and the heavy metal concert. We sense the diﬀerence between the wind and the quiet conversation as spanning a range of about 5/12 as much as the whole range from the wind to the heavy metal concert. . . the basic point to note about the decibel scale is that it is logarithmic. the following three levels of sound: barely audible wind quiet conversation . . The zero of the decibel scale is close to the lower limit of human hearing.
so the frictional force is proportional to amplitude. Why is this wrong? Answer. Friction is not necessarily bad in this context — a musical instrument that never got rid of any of its energy would be completely silent! The dissipation of the energy in a vibration is known as damping. since work equals force times distance.2 Energy Lost From Vibrations 29 . and mathematically. the more miserly the system becomes with giving away any more energy. and v is proportional to how far the objects travels in one cycle. Under these conditions. A pendulum may be damped mainly by air friction. In all cases. p. we have been making the relatively unrealistic assumption that a vibration would never die out. The less energy is left in the system. This constant friction force puts an upper limit on the total distance that the vibrating object can ever travel without replenishing its energy. I have not shown any point at which the damped vibration ﬁnally stops completely. A nonrigorous proof is as follows. This is referred to as exponential decay. If energy is being lost due to friction between two solid surfaces. (The friction force does reverse directions when the object turns around. and the kinetic and potential energy of the vibrations will therefore be gradually converted into heat. or even the most common one. selfcheck A Most people who try to draw graphs like those shown on the left will tend to shrink their wiggles horizontally as well as vertically. while other systems may exhibit friction forces that are proportional to v. In the graphs in ﬁgure b. then we expect the force of friction to be nearly independent of velocity. and the object must stop doing work when its energy is all converted into heat. the frictional forces get weaker due to the lower speeds. the loss of energy from the system is exponential: the system loses a ﬁxed percentage of its energy per cycle.2. and anyhow all the important physical insights can be gained by studying this case. then as the vibrations die down. not negative work. there will be friction. a guitar string will slowly convert its kinetic and potential energy into sound. the vibrations theoretically never die out completely. For a realistic mass on a spring. The Section 2. 100 b / Friction has the effect of pinching the x − t graph of a vibrating object.) Damping due to a constant friction force is not the only possibility however. the eﬀect is to “pinch” the sinusoidal x − t graph more and more with passing time. It turns out that friction proportional to v is the simplest case to analyze mathematically. The force of friction is proportional to v.2 Energy Lost From Vibrations Until now. Similarly. but reversing the direction of the motion at the same time that we reverse the direction of the force makes it certain that the object is always doing positive work. Is this realistic? Yes and no. If the friction force is proportional to v. which is approximately proportional to v 2 .
is halved It is customary to describe the amount of damping with a quantity called the quality factor. most speakers are designed with a Q of about 1. . If the player suddenly stops blowing. After all. The decay of a musical sound is part of what gives it its character. so after 10 cycles the energy will have fallen off by a factor of 535. the note will keep sounding for a short time. After another 10 cycles we lose another factor of 535.71828 . but the Q that is considered desirable is diﬀerent for diﬀerent instruments. Since both the work and the energy are proportional to A2 . 100 c / The amplitude with each cycle. so the sound intensity is reduced by a factor of 535 × 535 = 2. p. and indeed. (The origin of this obscure numerical factor is e2π . Exponential decay in a trumpet example 3 The vibrations of the air column inside a trumpet have a Q of about 10. What fraction of the energy is lost in each cycle? Answer. Q. how will the sound intensity 20 cycles later compare with the sound intensity while she was still blowing? The trumpet’s Q is 10. and might have a Q of 1000 or 10000. and a good musical instrument should have the right Q. the amount of energy taken away by friction in one cycle is a ﬁxed percentage of the amount of energy the system has. selfcheck B Figure c shows an xt graph for a strongly damped vibration. is the base of natural logarithms. the recorded music was made by musicians who knew how to shape the decays of their notes correctly. deﬁned as the number of cycles required for the energy to fall oﬀ by a factor of 535. We therefore expect that stereo speaker will have a very low Q. Q of a stereo speaker example 4 Stereo speakers are not supposed to reverberate or “ring” after an electrical signal that stops suddenly. A guitar is meant to keep on sounding for a long time after a string has been plucked. . This means that even after the trumpet player stops blowing.”) We will see later in the chapter that there are other reasons why a speaker should not have a high Q. (Lowquality speakers with larger Q values are referred to as “boomy.amount of work done by friction is proportional to the force and to the distance traveled.9 × 105 . 30 Chapter 2 Resonance . so a mechanical device that can vibrate for many oscillations before it loses a signiﬁcant fraction of its energy would be considered a highquality device. where e = 2. which loses half of its amplitude with every cycle. Choosing this particular number causes some of our later equations to come out nice and simple. Adding a longer “tail” on every note would make it sound wrong.) The terminology arises from the fact that friction is often considered a bad thing. One of the reasons why a cheap synthesizer sounds so bad is that the sound suddenly cuts oﬀ after a key is released. so the work done in one cycle is proportional to the square of the amplitude.
Nor can you give short pushes at randomly chosen times. A fairly realistic graph of the driving force acting on the child. Now we know realistically that the child on the swing will not keep increasing her energy forever. Work equals force times distance (or.2. driving force. e. the ear or a radio receiver. Eventually (and small children and our eardrums are thankful for this!). That type of random pushing would increase the child’s kinetic energy whenever you happened to be pushing in the same direction as her motion.3 Putting Energy Into Vibrations 31 . 3. 3. the damping force usually increases with velocity (we usually assume for simplicity that it is proportional to velocity). and we don’t even notice that it took a millisecond or a microsecond for the vibrations to “build up steam. that it is much simpler mathematically to consider a vibration with energy being pumped into it by a driving force that is itself a sinewave. A good example of this is your eardrum being driven by the force of a sound wave. pushing at the same point in each cycle. Graph d/1 shows what the child’s x − t graph would look like as you gradually put more and more energy into her vibrations. however. but more mathematically simple.g.” We are therefore mainly interested in predicting the behavior of the system once it has had enough time to reach essentially its maximum amplitude. This process of approaching a maximum amplitude happens extremely quickly in many cases. To make her build up her energy. As the vibrations increase in amplitude. Now comes the interesting part: what happens if the frequency of the driving force is mismatched to the frequency at which the system would naturally vibrate on its own? We all know that a d / 1. and this also serves to increase the rate at which damping forces remove energy as the amplitude increases. there is energy going out as well as in. This is known as the steadystate behavior of a vibrating system. the area under the forcedistance curve). more accurately. 2. This occurs for two reasons. but it would reduce her energy when your pushing happened to be in the opposite direction compared to her motion. Furthermore. the amplitude approaches a maximum value. you cannot just apply a constant force. It turns out.. there is an increase in the amount of energy taken away by damping with each cycle. you need to make your pushes rhythmic. nor does your eardrum end up exploding because a continuing sound wave keeps pumping more and more energy into it. In any realistic system.3 Putting Energy Into Vibrations When pushing a child on a swing. As the amplitude of the vibrations increases. e. A constant force will move the swing out to a certain angle. Section 2. A less realistic. at which energy is removed by the damping force just as quickly as it is being put in by the driving force. Pushing a child on a swing gradually puts more and more energy into her vibrations. In other words. A graph of your force versus time would probably look something like graph 2. but will not allow the swing to start swinging. your force needs to form a repeating pattern with the same frequency as the normal frequency of vibration of the swing. the damping force is being applied over a longer distance. e / The amplitude approaches a maximum.
We intuitively realize that quite a large force would be needed to achieve an amplitude of even 30 cm.. we are not just counteracting friction. (Even a digital radio can be tuned to 88. Otherwise all pitches would sound like 4000 Hz to us.) The ear also has some natural frequency of vibration. It always responds at the frequency at which it is driven.02 Hz or about one vibration per minute. The style is approximate and intuitive. but in this case the range of frequencies to which it can respond is quite broad. but we are going to try to make her swing back and forth at 3 Hz. It is as if we are artiﬁcially increasing the k of the swing. we are essentially just pumping energy back into the system to compensate for the loss of energy due to the damping (friction) force. The designers of the radio had to make the range fairly small to make it possible eliminate unwanted stations that happened to be nearby in frequency. Now imagine the case in which we drive the child at a very low frequency. say 0. although we know the ear has a frequency — about 4000 Hz — at which it would vibrate naturally. not at the system’s own natural frequency of vibration. This is a general fact about driven vibrations: (1) The steadystate response to a sinusoidal driving force occurs at the frequency of the force. At 3 Hz. We are essentially just holding the child in position while very slowly walking back and forth. however. it does not vibrate at 4000 Hz in response to a lowpitched 200 Hz tone. Imagine that a child on a swing has a natural frequency of vibration of 1 Hz. First. although there is only a small range over which a given station can be received. but this is wasted eﬀort because we spend just as much time decelerating the child (taking energy out of the system) as accelerating her (putting energy in).0 MHz and still bring in a station at 88. We are also providing an extra force to make the child’s momentum reverse itself more rapidly than it would if gravity and the tension in the chain were the only forces acting. but proofs are given in the subsequent optional section. When we push at the natural frequency of 1 Hz. i. The remainder of this section develops four important facts about the response of a system to a driving force whose frequency is not necessarily the same as the system’s natural frequency of vibration.e. Again we intuitively recognize that the 32 Chapter 2 Resonance .radio station doesn’t have to be tuned in exactly.1 MHz. the amplitude is less in proportion to the force. Now let’s think about the amplitude of the steadystate response. Evolution has made the ear’s frequency response as broad as possible because it was to our ancestors’ advantage to be able to hear everything from a low roars to a highpitched shriek. but it couldn’t be too small or you wouldn’t be able to adjust the knob accurately enough.
f / The collapsed section the Nimitz Freeway. and an unknown person made a movie of the collapse. Geological Survey shows that the mud layer’s resonance was centered on about 2. which is why it sounds like a rumble of indeterminate pitch rather than a low hum. and the rest is used in repetitively putting potential energy in on the upswing and taking it back out on the downswing. an opera singer must ﬁrst tap the glass to ﬁnd its natural frequency of vibration. An opera singer breaking a wine glass example 5 In order to break a wineglass by singing. and had a width covering a range from about 1 Hz to 4 Hz. mainly because a it was well documented by a local physics professor. Collapse of the Nimitz Freeway in an earthquake example 6 I led off the chapter with the dramatic collapse of the Tacoma Narrows Bridge. of Section 2. The resonant frequency of the layer depends on how stiff it is and also on how deep it is.S. without any longterm gain. the mud responded strongly to those that were close to its own natural 2. Only a very small part of our force goes into counteracting friction. during a 1989 earthquake is however a simpler example to analyze. the topmost layer acts like a system with a certain natural frequency of vibration. but now rather than reinforcing the gravity and tension forces we are working against them.5 Hz.3 Putting Energy Into Vibrations 33 .5 Hz frequency.5 Hz vibrations of the mud. The illfated section of the Nimitz freeway was built on a layer of mud. which is true for all driven vibrations: (2) A vibrating system resonates at its own natural frequency. When an earthquake wave comes along. An earthquake consists of many lowfrequency vibrations that occur simultaneously. CA. That is. or rock.5 Hz as well! The mud responded strongly to the earthquake waves with frequencies close to 2.5 Hz. eﬀectively reducing k. mud. Unfortunately. causing sections of it to collapse. the amplitude of the steadystate response is greatest in proportion to the amount of driving force when the driving force matches the natural frequency of vibration.amplitude will be very small in proportion to our driving force. Now all the structures we build are resting on geological layers of dirt. We can now generalize to make the following statement. Hough of the U. The collapse of a section of the Nimitz Freeway in Oakland. The frequencies that we can hear are not even the strongest ones. sort of like a cube of jello on a plate being shaken from side to side. and then sing the same note back. and analysis by geologist Susan E. When the earthquake wave came along with its mixture of frequencies. most of the energy is in the form of vibrations in the range of frequencies from about 1 Hz to 10 Hz. we are spending most of our eﬀort in artiﬁcially changing the k of the swing. Imagine how hard it would be to hold the child at our own headlevel when she is at the end of her swing! As in the toofast 3 Hz case. and the bridge responded strongly to the 2. sand. an engineering analysis after the quake showed that the overpass itself had a resonant frequency of 2.
The surprise here is that the wind was steady. The Nimitz Freeway and Tacoma Narrows Bridge are far better documented. and occurred in an era when engineers’ abilities to analyze the vibrations of a complex structure were much more advanced. the atoms are sufﬁciently far apart that they can act as individual vibrating systems. the more quickly the swirls would get across the bridge. The windtunnel models. are suspicious of the analysis of these reports. Based on ﬁlm footage and afterthefact wind tunnel experiments. Although the vibrations are of a very strange and abstract type described by the theory of quantum mechanics. and again in 1849 in Anjou. it began acting like a kite or an airplane wing. the gas will absorb light at 34 Chapter 2 Resonance . The bridge was probably destroyed by a different mechanism.Collapse of the Tacoma Narrows Bridge example 7 Let’s now examine the more conceptually difﬁcult case of the Tacoma Narrows Bridge. As shown in the ﬁgure.2 Hz set up an alternating pattern of wind gusts in the air immediately around it. We see something similar when a ﬂag ﬂaps in the wind. which then increased the amplitude of the bridge’s vibrations. If the wind was blowing at constant velocity. except that the ﬂag’s surface is usually vertical. why did it shake the bridge back and forth? The answer is a little complicated. Many modern engineers and scientists. It is possible that the collapses had more to do with poor construction and overloading than with resonance. and it involved resonance. it is worth bringing up the reports of bridges falling down when soldiers marching over them happened to step in rhythm with the bridge’s natural frequency of oscillation. which resulted in an up or down force on the bridge. however. it emits light waves with certain speciﬁc frequencies. they nevertheless obey the same basic rules as ordinary mechanical vibrations. The ﬁrst mechanism was the one responsible for the initial. and the higher the frequency of the driving force would be. these atomic vibrations respond most strongly to a driving force that matches their own natural frequency. Thus if we have a relatively cold gas with light waves of various frequencies passing through it. of the kind that you can see in a moving cloud of smoke. England. When a thin gas made of a certain element is heated. in which its vibrations at its own natural frequency of 0. As long as we’re on the subject of collapsing bridges. show that the pattern of vibration of the bridge excited by this mechanism would have been a different one than the one that ﬁnally destroyed the bridge. As one of these swirls moved off of the bridge. it appears that two different mechanisms were involved. there was an abrupt change in air pressure. As the wind moved over the bridge. At just the right velocity. it established swirling patterns of air ﬂow around itself. This backandforth sequence of forces is exactly the kind of periodic driving force that would excite a resonance. which are like a ﬁngerprint of that element. The faster the wind. Emission and absorption of light waves by atoms example 8 In a very thin gas. As with all other vibrations. relatively weak vibrations. France. This is supposed to have happened in 1831 in Manchester. increasing the amplitude of the vibrations until the bridge ﬁnally collapsed. however. This vicious cycle fed upon itself. the frequency would be the right one to excite the resonance.
i. a violin’s Q is much lower than a piano’s. the steadystate vibrations have an amplitude that is proportional to Q. resonances do not suddenly fall oﬀ to zero outside a certain frequency range. As we have seen already. you know that the note dies away very quickly. The steadystate behavior is an equilibrium between energy input from the driving force and energy loss due to damping. (A piano has a set of three strings for each note. then a large amount of force Section 2. resulting in loweramplitude steadystate motion.3 Putting Energy Into Vibrations 35 . As shown in the graph.precisely those frequencies at which it would emit light if heated. A lowQ oscillator. Roughly speaking. full (This equation is only a good approximation when Q is large. This means that its resonances are much weaker in amplitude. the halfmaximum points on the graph correspond to the places where the amount of the driving force being wasted in this way is the same as the amount of driving force being used productively to replace the energy being dumped out by the damping force. If the damping force is strong. the reason why the response of an oscillator is smaller away from resonance is that much of the driving force is being used to make the system act as if it had a diﬀerent k. It gives us a way to determine numerically how wide a range of driving frequencies will produce a strong response. In other words. p. g / The deﬁnition of the width at half maximum.. one with strong damping.) Why would this trick be unlikely to work with a violin? If you have heard the sound of a violin being plucked (the pizzicato effect). what should she look for? Answer. 100 Piano strings ringing in sympathy with a sung note example 9 A sufﬁciently loud musical note sung near a piano with the lid raised can cause the corresponding strings in the piano to vibrate.) Why? It is not immediately obvious that there should be any logical relationship between Q and the FWHM. This is fairly intuitive. Our fourth and ﬁnal fact about resonance is perhaps the most surprising. all struck by the same hammer.e. (3) When a system is driven at resonance. (4) The FWHM of a resonance is related to its Q and its resonant frequency fres by the equation FWHM = fres Q . Here’s the idea. It is usual to describe the width of a resonance by its full width at halfmaximum (FWHM) as illustrated in ﬁgure g. dumps its energy faster. selfcheck C If an opera singer is shopping for a wine glass that she can impress her friends by breaking.
the damping force is weak. What is its Q? Q = fr es /FWHM = 1000.e. The second reason is that we want it to be able to respond to a large range of frequencies. Q of a stereo speaker example 13 We have already given one reason why a stereo speaker should have a low Q: otherwise it would continue ringing after the end of the musical note on the recording. roughly what is the Q of a saxophone? Five percent is the width on one side of the resonance. i.” i. which gives the saxophone a certain resonant frequency. how long will it take for a 100Hz tone played on a baritone saxophone to die down by a factor of 535 in energy. Ten cycles at a frequency of 100 Hz would correspond to a time of 0. This corresponds to driving the horn slightly off of resonance. use a higherQ setup because their style only calls for enough pitch variation to produce a vibrato. If the pitch can be altered by about 5% up or down (about one musical halfstep) without too much effort.. This is why a saxophone note doesn’t “ring” like a note played on a piano or an electric guitar. so the full width is about 10%. however. (Blues and jazz saxophone players will typically choose a mouthpiece that has a low Q. 36 Chapter 2 Resonance . Changing the pitch of a wind instrument example 10 A saxophone player normally selects which note to play by choosing a certain ﬁngering. This is an extremely high Q compared to most mechanical systems. Q of a radio receiver example 12 A radio receiver used in the FM band needs to be tuned in to within about 0. and we cannot get very far from the resonant frequency before the two are comparable. the horn will continue sounding for about 10 cycles before its energy falls off by a factor of 535.) Decay of a saxophone tone example 11 If a typical saxophone setup has a Q of about 10. If. “Legit. The musician can also.is needed to counteract it. on the other hand. so that they can produce the bluesy pitchslides typical of their style. and we can waste quite a bit of driving force on changing k before it becomes comparable to the damping force. change the pitch signiﬁcantly by altering the tightness of her lips. FWHM / fr es = 0.. once the musician stops blowing.1 MHz for signals at about 100 MHz.e. then even a small amount of force being wasted on changing k will become signiﬁcant in proportion. which is not very long. after the player suddenly stops blowing? A Q of 10 means that it takes 10 cycles for the vibrations to die down in energy by a factor of 535.1. classically oriented players. This implies a Q of about 10.1 seconds.
Now a proton in one of your body’s hydrogen atoms ﬁnds itself surrounded by many other whirling. As it settles down.” because people are scared of the word “nuclear. because there is no friction inside an atom. Finally. and the combination of its spin and its electrical charge cause it to behave like a tiny magnet. the proton will absorb radiowave energy strongly and oscillate wildly. That is. Essentially the same physics lies behind the technique called Nuclear Magnetic Resonance (NMR). and exert magnetic forces on the proton. the circling motion of the proton’s charge makes it magnetic. but by the reemission of radio waves. i / A member of the author’s family. j / A threedimensional computer reconstruction of the shape of a human brain. allowing medical images to be made. Its vibrations are damped not by friction. By working backward through this chain of reasoning. plus the electrons and nuclei of the other nearby atoms. they will actually tell you you are undergoing “magnetic resonance imaging” or “MRI. h/2. The compass needle is simply a small magnet. 1. you have undoubtedly noticed that if you shake it. which consists of a coil of wire through which electrical charges pass. heavy proton. it acts like a damped oscillator of the type we have been discussing. there will be a particular set of magnetic forces acting on the proton and a particular value of k. and the planet earth is a big magnet. and in the same way. The principle identical to that of an electromagnet. each consisting of a small. 2. the circling motion of the charges in the coil of wire makes it magnetic. If you ever have an NMR scan. the nucleus of a hydrogen atom is just one proton. A proton is always spinning on its own axis. and if the frequency of the radio waves matches the resonant frequency of the proton. The NMR apparatus bombards the sample with radio waves. lightweight electron orbiting around a large. NMR is a technique used to deduce the molecular structure of unknown chemical substances. The magnetic forces between them tend to bring the needle to an equilibrium position in which it lines up with the planetearthmagnet. who turned out to be healthy.” In fact. Section 2. These neighbors act like magnets. based on magnetic resonance data. electrically charged particles: its own electron. It is also possible to locate atoms in space. h/1. It is impressive. Depending on the structure of the molecule in which the hydrogen atom ﬁnds itself.3 Putting Energy Into Vibrations 37 . Its vibrations are of the strange and spooky kind described by the laws of quantum mechanics. one can determine the geometric arrangement of the hydrogen atom’s neighboring atoms.Nuclear magnetic resonance example 14 If you have ever played with a magnetic compass. Here’s how NMR works. h / Example 14. A compass needle vibrates about the equilibrium position under the inﬂuence of the earth’s magnetic forces. it should be noted that the behavior of the proton cannot be described entirely correctly by Newtonian physics. the nuclei being referred to are simply the nonradioactive nuclei of atoms found naturally in your body. Your body contains large numbers of hydrogen atoms. The k of the vibrating proton is simply a measure of the total strength of these magnetic forces. it takes some time to settle down. that the few simple ideas we have learned about resonance can still be applied successfully to describe many aspects of this exotic system. however. The orientation of a proton’s spin vibrates around its equilibrium direction under the inﬂuence of the magnetic forces coming from the surrounding electrons and nuclei. and it is also used for making medical images of the inside of people’s bodies.
I could feel the beam trembling. Finally. and attached it to one of the steel beams of a building that was under construction in New York. told a credulous reporter the following story about an application of resonance. Although the article in which he was quoted didn’t say so. “In a few minutes. ..Discussion Question A Nikola Tesla. [If] I had kept on ten minutes more. one of the inventors of radio and an archetypical mad scientist.” Is this physically plausible? 38 Chapter 2 Resonance . Gradually the trembling increased in intensity and extended throughout the whole great mass of steel. he presumably claimed to have tuned it to the resonant frequency of the building. the structure began to creak and weave. and the steelworkers came to the ground panicstricken. He built an electric vibrator that ﬁt in his pocket.. believing that there had been an earthquake. I could have laid that building ﬂat in the street.
we will then prove statements 2. The spring does not actually change its length at all. We assume without proof statement 1. and we use the symbol b for the proportionality constant. We write fres for 2π k/m. and a radial component Fr which works either with or against the spring’s force. v = 2πA/T . The damping force can be imagined as a backward drag force supplied by some ﬂuid through which the mass is moving. of the vibrations as seen edgeon. 2 m2 (f 2 − f 2 )2 + b2 f 2 2π 4π res Section 2. From now on. 3.4 Proofs Our ﬁrst goal is to predict the amplitude of the steadystate vibrations as a function of the frequency of the driving force and the amplitude of the driving force. we wish to know the amplitude in terms of —F—. We visualize the system shown in ﬁgures km. and Newton’s second law gives a = F/m = 1 (kA + Fr )/m. represented by a hand towing the mass with a string. The driving force.(2) 2πbf However. frequency and equations 13 can then be combined to give the ﬁnal result F [4] A= .2. let’s drop the cumbersome magnitude symbols. With that equation in hand. but it appears to from the ﬂattened perspective of a person viewing the system edgeon. With the Pythagorean theorem. depending on whether we are driving the system above or below its resonant frequency. The speed of the rotating mass is the circumference of the circle divided by the period. that the steadystate motion occurs at the same frequency as the driving force. l / Driving at resonance. The radius of the circle is the amplitude. The amplitude of the vibrations can be found by attacking the equation Ft  = bv = 2πbAf . As with the proof in chapter 1. we make use of the fact that a sinusoidal vibration is the same as the projection of circular motion onto a line. (3) 1+ Fr Ft 2 k / Driving at a frequency above resonance. its acceleration (which is directly inward) is a = v 2 /r. which gives Ft  [2] A= . in which the mass swings in a circle on the end of a spring. As usual. Straightforward algebra yields Fr 2πm 2 2 [1] = f − fres . it is easily proven that F [3] Ft = . has a tangential component Ft  which counteracts the damping force. not Ft . and 4 from the previous section. m / Driving at a below resonance.4 Proofs 39 . and we see that it becomes zero when the system is driven at resonance. Ft  = Fd . Fd  = bv. A. we assume that the damping is proportional to velocity. Ft bf This is the ratio of the wasted force to the useful force.
. multiplied by the distance traveled. so f and fres can be taken as synonyms. which makes the second term smaller. (Actually this is only approximately true. The equation for the FWHM can then be restated as a proportionality FWHM ∝ k/Qfres m ∝ fres /Q.. causing the amplitude to be as big as possible. and the Q of the system is inversely proportional to b. not the actual equation F W HM = fres /Q. because it is possible to make A a little bigger by decreasing f a little below fres . i. bv ∝ bAfres . This technical issue is addressed in homework problem 3 on page 43. i. We are assuming that the width of the resonance is small compared to the resonant frequency. Thus. to the inverse of the quantity inside the square root in equation 4. the ﬁrst term inside the square root vanishes. At resonance. (This is only a proportionality. 2πm We wish to connect this to Q.Statement 2: maximum amplitude at resonance Equation 4 shows directly that the amplitude is maximized when the system is driven at its resonant frequency. b FWHM = . not an equation. the ﬁrst term inside the square root vanishes. Statement 4: FWHM related to Q We will satisfy ourselves by proving only the proportionality F W HM ∝ fres /Q. which can be interpreted as the energy of the free (undriven) vibrations divided by the work done by damping in one cycle. The energy is proportional to A2 .) We therefore ﬁnd that Q is proportional to k/bfres . we have 2 f 2 − fres = fres ± FWHM 2 2 2 − fres 1 = ±fres · FWHM + FWHM2 4 If we assume that the width of the resonance is small compared to the resonant frequency. At resonance. since the force is not constant. when the two terms are equal. and the latter is proportional to the force. A. then the FWHM2 term is negligible compared to the fres · FWHM term.e.) Statement 3: amplitude at resonance proportional to Q Equation 4 shows that the amplitude at resonance is proportional to 1/b. and this makes the denominator as small as possible. At the halfmaximum points.e. The former equals kA2 /2. and the halfmaximum points occur at frequencies for which the whole quantity inside the square root is double its value at resonance. and setting the terms in equation 4 equal to each other gives 4π 2 m2 (fres FWHM)2 = b2 f 2 . so the amplitude at resonance is proportional to Q. 40 Chapter 2 Resonance .
not the natural frequency f . . the quality factor the natural (resonant) frequency of a vibrating system. . When a vibrating system is driven by an external force. . . Energy is lost from a vibrating system for various reasons such as the conversion to heat via friction or the emission of sound.e. In the steady state. an external force that pumps energy into a vibrating system resonance . Summary 41 . The following are four important facts about a vibrating system being driven by an external force: (1) The steadystate response to a sinusoidal driving force occurs at the frequency of the force. . the number of oscillations required for a system’s energy to fall oﬀ by a factor of 535 due to damping driving force . fres . . . . . . . . A driving force that pumps energy into the system may drive the system at its own natural frequency or at some other frequency. the tendency of a vibrating system to respond most strongly to a driving force whose frequency is close to its own natural frequency of vibration steady state . . we are usually interested in its steadystate behavior. . . which in the case of a driven system is equal to the frequency of the driving force. .. . or the frictional force that causes the loss of energy quality factor . the dissipation of a vibration’s energy into heat energy. . Summary The energy of a vibration is always proportional to the square of the amplitude. . . . . .. i. . its behavior after it has had time to settle into a steady response to a driving force. . . assuming the amplitude is small. . . . the same amount of energy is pumped into the system during each cycle as is lost to damping during the same period. the frequency at which it would vibrate if it was simply kicked and left alone the frequency at which the system actually vibrates. . This eﬀect. called damping. i. .Summary Selected Vocabulary damping . . will cause the vibrations to decay exponentially unless energy is pumped into the system to replace the loss. . .e. the behavior of a vibrating system after it has had plenty of time to settle into a steady response to a driving force Notation Q . . . not at the system’s own natural frequency of vibration.
the steadystate vibrations have an amplitude that is proportional to Q. (4) The FWHM of a resonance is related to its Q and its resonant frequency fres by the equation FWHM = fres . That is.(2) A vibrating system resonates at its own natural frequency. the amplitude of the steadystate response is greatest in proportion to the amount of driving force when the driving force matches the natural frequency of vibration. Q (This equation is only a good approximation when Q is large.) 42 Chapter 2 Resonance . (3) When a system is driven at resonance.
Problems
Key √ A computerized answer check is available online. A problem that requires calculus. A diﬃcult problem.
1 If one stereo system is capable of producing 20 watts of sound power and another can put out 50 watts, how many times greater is the amplitude of the sound wave that can be created by the more powerful system? (Assume they are playing the same music.) 2 Many ﬁsh have an organ known as a swim bladder, an airﬁlled cavity whose main purpose is to control the ﬁsh’s buoyancy an allow it to keep from rising or sinking without having to use its muscles. In some ﬁsh, however, the swim bladder (or a small extension of it) is linked to the ear and serves the additional purpose of amplifying sound waves. For a typical ﬁsh having such an anatomy, the bladder has a resonant frequency of 300 Hz, the bladder’s Q is 3, and the maximum ampliﬁcation is about a factor of 100 in energy. Over what range of frequencies would the ampliﬁcation be at least a factor of 50? 3 As noted in section 2.4, it is only approximately true that the amplitude has its maximum at f = (1/2π) k/m. Being more careful, we should actually deﬁne two diﬀerent symbols, f0 = (1/2π) k/m and fres for the slightly diﬀerent frequency at which the amplitude is a maximum, i.e., the actual resonant frequency. In this notation, the amplitude as a function of frequency is A= 2π F
2 4π 2 m2 f 2 − f0 2
. + b2 f 2
Show that the maximum occurs not at fo but rather at the frequency fres =
2 f0 −
b2 = 8π 2 m2
1 2 f0 − FWHM2 2
Hint: Finding the frequency that minimizes the quantity inside the square root is equivalent to, but much easier than, ﬁnding the frequency that maximizes the amplitude. 4 (a) Let W be the amount of work done by friction in the ﬁrst cycle of oscillation, i.e., the amount of energy lost to heat. Find the fraction of the original energy E that remains in the oscillations after n cycles of motion. (b) From this prove the equation (recalling that the number 535 in the deﬁnition of Q is e2π ). (c) Use this to prove the approximation 1/Q ≈ (1/2π)W/E. (Hint: Use the approximation ln(1 + x) ≈ x, which is valid for small values of x.)
Problems
43
5 The goal of this problem is to reﬁne the proportionality FWHM ∝ fres /Q into the equation FWHM = fres /Q, i.e., to prove that the constant of proportionality equals 1. (a) Show that the work done by a damping force F = −bv over one cycle of steadystate motion equals Wdamp = −2π 2 bf A2 . Hint: It is less confusing to calculate the work done over half a cycle, from x = −A to x = +A, and then double it. (b) Show that the fraction of the undriven oscillator’s energy lost to damping over one cycle is Wdamp /E = 4π 2 bf /k. (c) Use the previous result, combined with the result of problem 4, to prove that Q equals k/2πbf . (d) Combine the preceding result for Q with the equation FWHM = b/2πm from section 2.4 to prove the equation FWHM = fres /Q. 6 The ﬁgure is from Shape memory in Spider draglines, Emile, Le Floch, and Vollrath, Nature 440:621 (2006). Panel 1 shows an electron microscope’s image of a thread of spider silk. In 2, a spider is hanging from such a thread. From an evolutionary point of view, it’s probably a bad thing for the spider if it twists back and forth while hanging like this. (We’re referring to a backandforth rotation about the axis of the thread, not a swinging motion like a pendulum.) The authors speculate that such a vibration could make the spider easier for predators to see, and it also seems to me that it would be a bad thing just because the spider wouldn’t be able to control its orientation and do what it was trying to do. Panel 3 shows a graph of such an oscillation, which the authors measured using a video camera and a computer, with a 0.1 g mass hung from it in place of a spider. Compared to humanmade ﬁbers such as kevlar or copper wire, the spider thread has an unusual set of properties: 1. It has a low Q, so the vibrations damp out quickly. 2. It doesn’t become brittle with repeated twisting as a copper wire would. 3. When twisted, it tends to settle in to a new equilibrium angle, rather than insisting on returning to its original angle. You can see this in panel 2, because although the experimenters initially twisted the wire by 33 degrees, the thread only performed oscillations with an amplitude much smaller than ±35 degrees, settling down to a new equilibrium at 27 degrees. 4. Over much longer time scales (hours), the thread eventually resets itself to its original equilbrium angle (shown as zero degrees on the graph). (The graph reproduced here only shows the motion over a much shorter time scale.) Some humanmade materials have this “memory” property as well, but they
Problem 6.
44
Chapter 2
Resonance
typically need to be heated in order to make them go back to their original shapes. Focusing on property number 1, estimate the Q of spider silk from the graph.
Problems
45
46 Chapter 2 Resonance .
This type of wave motion is the topic of the present chapter. (a). we conﬁne ourselves to wave phenomena that can be analyzed as if the medium (e. during which the water at the center vibrates above and below the normal water level. In the next chapter we discuss what happens to waves that have a boundary around them.“The Great Wave Off Kanagawa. Second. It isn’t hard to understand why removing your ﬁngertip creates ripples rather than simply allowing the water to sink back down uniformly. and the process of ﬂattening out occurs over a long period of time. causes a disturbance that spreads outward. 2. You will have noticed two results that are surprising to most people. What are waves and why do they exist? Put your ﬁngertip in the middle of a cup of water and then remove it suddenly. but being able to vibrate wouldn’t be of much use unless the vibrations could be transmitted to the listener’s ear by sound waves. and the water next to the crater ﬂows downhill to ﬁll in the hole. left behind by your ﬁnger has sloping sides. 1. you have found that the ripples bounce oﬀ of the walls of the cup.g. First. on the other hand. ripples spread out. The initial crater. Instead. the water) was inﬁnite and the same everywhere. in much the same way that a ball would bounce oﬀ of a wall. The water far away. the ﬂat surface of the water does not simply sink uniformly to ﬁll in the volume vacated by your ﬁnger.” by Katsushika Hokusai (17601849). Until then. 47 .. initially has a / Dipping a ﬁnger in some water. Chapter 3 Free Waves Your vocal cords or a saxophone reed can vibrate.
This eﬀect cascades outward. The area just outside of this region has been robbed of some of its water in order to build the hill. 48 Chapter 3 Free Waves . because there is no slope for it to ﬂow down. and overshoots. producing ripples. As the hole ﬁlls up. creating a little hill where there had been a hole originally.no way of knowing what has happened. the rising water at the center gains upward momentum. so a depressed “moat” is formed. (b).
Two wave patterns can therefore overlap in the same region of space. This additive rule is referred to as the principle of superposition. then they combine to make an extradeep 6 cm trough.” Superposition can occur not just with sinusoidal waves like the ones in the ﬁgure above but with waves of any shape. For instance. they add together. If you hit a clothesline sharply. as shown in ﬁgure b. the waves momentarily cancel each other out at that point. 1. The waves combine at this point to make a 6cm crest. These pulses consist only of a single hump or trough. If both waves would have had a troughs measuring 3 cm. Unlike material objects.b / The two circular patterns of ripples pass through each other.e. A +3 cm crest and a 3 cm trough result in a height of zero. each wave would have had a crest 3 cm above the normal water level. 3. you will observe pulses heading oﬀ in both directions. This is analogous to Section 3. wave patterns can overlap in space.1 Wave Motion 49 . “superposition” being merely a fancy word for “adding. i. Superposition The most profound diﬀerence is that waves do not display have anything analogous to the normal forces between objects that come in contact. We use negative numbers to represent depressions in the water. A pulse is simply a wave of very short duration. The ﬁgures on the following page show superposition of wave pulses. and when this happens they combine by addition.1 Wave Motion There are three main ways in which wave motion diﬀers from the motion of objects made of matter.. suppose that at a certain location in at a certain moment in time. Where the two waves coincide.
A pulse travels to the left. For other types of waves. and a series of frame chosen to show the motion. 1. one end of the spring was shaken by hand. Experiments to date have not shown any deviation from the principle of superposition in the case of light waves. the ﬁfth frame shows the spring just about perfectly ﬂat. then why does the motion pick up again? Why doesn’t the spring just stay ﬂat? c / These pictures show the motion of wave pulses along a spring. one positive and one negative. 50 Chapter 3 Free Waves . Movies were ﬁlmed.the way ripples spread out in all directions when you make a disturbance at one point on water. If the two pulses have essentially canceled each other out perfectly. Superposition of two colliding positive pulses. Superposition of two colliding pulses. The same occurs when the hammer on a piano comes up and hits a string. To make a pulse. Discussion Question A In ﬁgure c. 2. 3. it is typically a very good approximation for lowenergy waves.
Figure d shows a series of water waves before it has reached a rubber duck (left). The medium vibrates. but is not carried along with the wave. do any parts of the spring have zero velocity? Answer. 2. you can detect the sidetoside motion of the spring because the spring appears blurry. The duck bobs around its initial position. e / As the wave pulse goes by.1 Wave Motion 51 . represented by a single photo. the motion of the wave pattern is in the opposite direction compared to the motion of the medium. If it did. but the medium (spring) is moving up and down. not to the right. This shows that the water itself does not ﬂow outward with the wave. the wave progresses through space. the ribbon tied to the spring is not carried along.d / As the wave pattern passes the rubber duck. how would you describe the motion of the different parts of the spring? Other than the ﬂat parts. having just passed the duck (middle) and having progressed about a meter beyond the duck (right). At a certain instant. p. the duck stays put. The medium is not transported with the wave. The motion of the wave pattern is to the right. In other words. 100 A worm example 1 The worm in the ﬁgure is moving to the right. we could empty one end of a swimming pool simply by kicking up waves! We must distinguish between the motion of the medium (water in this case) and the motion of the wave pattern through the medium. The water isn’t moving forward with the wave. moves to the left. selfcheck A In ﬁgure e. Section 3. The wave pattern. a pulse consisting of a compressed area of its body.
for certain types of waves). If the water was ﬂowing forward. In fact. The magnitude of a wave’s velocity depends on the properties of the medium (and perhaps also on the shape of the wave. The surfer is carried forward because forward is downhill. not faster. but if it enters another balloon it will speed back up again! Similarly. it is even possible to surf down the back side of a wave. No matter how hard the boat pushes against the water. h / Example 4. If the water was moving along with the wave and the surfer. Surﬁng example 2 The incorrect belief that the medium moves with the wave is often reinforced by garbled secondhand knowledge of surﬁng. Hull speed example 4 The speeds of most boats. The sound waves from an exploding stick of dynamite carry a lot of energy. The crest of a wave travels faster than the trough. but the reverse can also happen. 3: a breaking 3. and can’t go any faster. A sound wave traveling through a helium balloon will slow down when it emerges into the air. water waves travel more quickly over deeper water. Not so with waves. and can be sped up or slowed down by a force that increases or decreases its kinetic energy. 1000 m/s in helium. Breaking waves example 3 The velocity of water waves increases with depth. Sound waves travel at about 340 m/s in air. so a wave will slow down as it passes over an underwater ridge. it can’t make the wave move ahead faster and get out of the way. although the ride wouldn’t last very long because the surfer and the wave would quickly part company. Anyone who has actually surfed knows that the front of the board pushes the water to the sides. The boat has run up against a limit on its speed because it can’t climb over its own wave. The surfer is dragging his hand in the water. are limited by the fact that they make a wave due to their motion through the water. Dolphins get around the problem by leaping out of the water. but are no faster than any other waves. but speed up again as it emerges into deeper water. and of some surfaceswimming animals.f / Example 2. It is not so surprising that a change in medium can slow down a wave. the only reason its speed will change is if it enters a diﬀerent medium or if the properties of the medium change. Adding energy to 52 Chapter 3 Free Waves . In the following section we will give an example of the physical relationship between the wave speed and the properties of the medium. The boat in ﬁgure h is going at the same speed as its own waves. If you kick up water waves in a pool. The wave’s speed depends only on the medium. you will ﬁnd that kicking harder makes waves that are taller (and therefore carry more energy). not because of any forward ﬂow of the water. Once a wave is created. A wave’s velocity depends on the medium. and this can cause the wave to break. as in in ﬁgure f. then a person ﬂoating in the water up to her neck would be carried along just as quickly as someone on a surfboard. this wouldn’t happen. g / Example wave. A material object can move with any velocity. creating a wake — the surfer can even drag his hand through the water.
the analogous patterns would be spherical waves and plane waves. j. The shape of the wave made by a boat tends to mold itself to the shape of the boat’s hull. and in the case of water waves the resulting wave pattern is the familiar circular ripple. on the other hand. The maximum speed of a boat whose speed is limited by this effect is therefore closely related to the length of its hull. Discussion Questions A [see above] B Sketch two positive wave pulses on a string that are overlapping but not right on top of each other.1 Wave Motion 53 . what about its direction? Waves spread out in all directions from every point on the disturbance that created them. how would the energy of the wave fall off with distance? i / Circular patterns. we lay a pole on the surface of the water and wiggle it up and down. Wave patterns If the magnitude of a wave’s velocity vector is preordained. unlike many other types of wave. For a threedimensional wave such as a sound wave. Throughout this chapter and the next. and draw their superposition. Now do the same for a pulse moving to the left. Inﬁnitely many patterns are possible. while not hesitating to broaden our horizons when it can be done without too much complication. but linear or plane waves are often the simplest to analyze. A water wave. has a speed that depends on its shape: a broader wave moves faster. If. Sketch the velocity vectors of the various parts of the string.the wave doesn’t speed it up. D In a spherical sound wave spreading out from a point. we create a linear wave pattern. and the maximum speed is called the hull speed. Sailboats designed for racing are not just long and skinny to make them more streamlined — they are also long so that their hull speeds will be high. Since all the velocity vectors are parallel to one another. we may consider it as a single point. and linear wave j / Plane and patterns. Do the same for a positive pulse running into a negative pulse. the problem is eﬀectively onedimensional. i/1. C A traveling wave pulse is moving to the right on a string. it just increases its amplitude. spherical wave Section 3. because the velocity vector is in the same direction no matter what part of the wave we look at. so a boat with a longer hull makes a broader wave that moves faster. i/2. we will restrict ourselves mainly to wave motion in one dimension. If the disturbance is small.
Intuitive ideas Consider a string that has been struck. onedimensional type of wave: a wave on a string.2 Waves on a String So far you have learned some counterintuitive things about the behavior of waves. The important concept is that curvature makes force: the curved areas of a wave tend to experience forces resulting in an acceleration toward the mouth of the curve. If you have ever stretched a string between the bottoms of two openmouthed cans to talk to a friend. In example 1 it is clear that both the forces on the central mass cancel out. k / Hitting a key on a piano causes a hammer to come up from underneath and hit a string (actually a set of three strings). Since this chapter is about free waves. Only in curved regions such as 3 and 4 is an acceleration produced. l / A string is struck with a hammer. How far you penetrate in this section is up to you.” We can gain insight by modeling the string as a series of masses connected by springs. 1. however. not bounded ones. you should nevertheless be aware of the important result that the speed at which a pulse moves does not depend on the size or shape of the pulse. the hammer actually strikes it quickly and makes a dent in it. This quick and dirty treatment is then followed by a rigorous attack using the methods of calculus. and depends on your mathematical selfconﬁdence. some that are sloping but not curved. m/1. so it will not accelerate. we pretend that our string is inﬁnitely long. but on a onedimensional string. Although we usually think of a piano wire simply as vibrating. “all directions” becomes “both directions. which then ripples out in both directions.) If we look at various microscopic portions of the string. and two pulses ﬂy off. there will be some areas that are ﬂat. The ﬁrst half of this section aims to build your intuition by investigating a simple. resulting in the creation of two wave pulses. It may move at constant velocity to either side. 3 and 4. 2. If you skip the later parts and proceed to the next section. The result is a pair of pulses moving away from the point of impact. After the qualitative discussion. you were putting this type of wave to work. but intuition can be trained.3. one traveling to the left and one to the right. The same is true of 2. 54 Chapter 3 Free Waves . (In the actual string the mass and the springiness are both contributed by the molecules themselves. l/1. and some that are curved. that an uncurved portion of the string need not remain motionless. Stringed instruments are another good example. however. This is a fact that is true for many other types of waves. we will use simple approximations to investigate the speed of a wave pulse on a string. m / A continuous string can be modeled as a series of discrete masses connected by springs. In these examples. This is analogous to the way ripples spread out in all directions from a splash in water. the vector sum of the two forces acting on the central mass is not zero. Note. 2. which may be skipped by the student who has not studied calculus. 2.
then this object has a mass of approximately µw (mass/length × length = mass). we assume that h is much less than w. For simplicity. ﬂattened position. The acceleration of the segment (actually the acceleration of its center of mass) is n / A triangular pulse spreads out. and throughout the derivation. we imagine a hammer blow that creates a triangular dent. The time required to move a distance h under constant acceleration Section 3.2 Waves on a String 55 . the velocity of a wave depends on the properties of the medium. Of course the tip of the triangle has a longer distance to travel than the edges. n/1. but our analysis is too crude to address such details. and one of the same magnitude acting down and to the left. the length of the sloping side is essentially the same as w/2. Roughly speaking. If the angle of the sloping sides is θ. There are two forces acting on the triangular hump. t. µ (Greek letter mu). we see that sin θ equals h divided by the length of one of the sloping sides. at the edges of the triangle. we will pretend that it is constant for the sake of our simple estimate. the time interval between n/1 and 2 is the amount of time required for the initial dent to accelerate from rest and reach its normal.. in this case the string. so that we can ignore the fact that this segment of the string has a length slightly greater than w. The string is kinked. tightly curved. As always. and the mass per unit length. Since h is much less than w. it might seem surprising that the triangle would so neatly spring back to a perfectly ﬂat shape. Indeed. We will estimate the amount of time. If we consider the part of the string encompassed by the initial dent as a single object. required until each of the pulses has traveled a distance equal to the width of the pulse itself. one of magnitude T acting down and to the right. so it is here that there will be large forces that do not cancel out to zero. (Here.e. then the total force on the segment equals 2T sin θ. The velocity of the pulses is then ±w/t. i. and F = 4T h/w. so we have sin θ = h/w.Approximate treatment We now carry out an approximate treatment of the speed at which two pulses will spread out from an initial indentation on a string. Dividing the triangle into two right triangles.) Although the downward acceleration of this segment of the string will be neither constant over time nor uniform across the string. a = F/m = 4T h/µw2 . T . but again we ignore the complications and simply assume that the segment as a whole must travel a distance h. It is an experimental fact that it does. The properties of the string can be summarized by two variables: the tension.
a function of two variables. dx (This can be proved by vector addition of the two inﬁnitesimal forces acting on either side. It comes from the assumption that the acceleration was constant. or. i. The remarkable feature of this result is that the velocity of the pulses does not depend at all on w or h. The importance of the above derivation lies in the insight it brings —that all pulses move with the same speed — rather than in the details of the numerical result. t). and that the second derivative is a measure of curvature.. any triangular pulse has the same speed. The correct result for the velocity of the pulses is v= T µ . when actually the total force on the segment would diminish as it ﬂattened out. Our ﬁnal result for the velocity of the pulses is v = = w t 2T µ . Rigorous derivation using calculus (optional) After expending considerable eﬀort for an approximate solution. triangular or otherwise.a is found by solving h = 1 at2 to yield 2 t= 2h a µ =w 2T . Knowing that the force on any small segment of string depends on the curvature of the string in that area. The reason for our toohigh value for the velocity is not hard to guess. Let the ﬂat position of the string deﬁne the x axis. travels along the string at the same speed.e. The motion of the string is characterized by y(x. It is an experimental fact (and we will also prove rigorously in the following subsection) that any pulse of any kind. we now display the power of calculus with a rigorous and completely general treatment that is nevertheless much shorter and easier. it is not surprising to ﬁnd that the inﬁnitesimal force dF acting on an inﬁnitesimal segment dx is given by d2 y dF = T 2 dx . after so many approximations we cannot expect to have gotten all the numerical factors right. 56 Chapter 3 Free Waves . Of course. so that y measures how far a point on the string is from equilibrium.) The acceleration is then a = dF/dm.
d2 y T d2 y = dt2 µ dx2 . This is no more than a fancy mathematical statement of the intuitive fact developed above. Therefore the sum of any two solutions will also be a solution. where f is any function of one variable. In general. Evaluating the second derivatives on both sides of the equation gives (±v)2 f = T f µ . Because of the chain rule. The second derivative with respect to time is related to the second derivative with respect to position.2 Waves on a String 57 . that the string accelerates so as to ﬂatten out its curves.substituting dm = µdx. we note that it already proves the principle of superposition. Before even bothering to look for solutions to this equation. we expect that this equation will be satisﬁed by any function y(x. and we ﬁnd that we have a valid solution for any function f . Section 3. provided that v is given by v= T µ . Based on experiment. Squaring gets rid of the sign. such a function will be of the form y = f (x − vt) or y = f (x + vt). each derivative with respect to time brings out a factor of . t) that describes a pulse or wave pattern moving to the left or right at the correct speed v. because the derivative of a sum is the sum of the derivatives.
we do not feel the slightest breeze. The roars and whooshes of Hollywood’s space ships are fun. such as helium or water. then what type of wave is it? It must be a vibration of a physical medium such as air. ﬂat wall. Sounds do not knock other sounds out of the way when they collide. • The velocity of sound depends on the medium. Even standing in front of a titanic speaker playing earsplitting music. If sound has all the properties we expect from a wave. you can easily detect an echo when you clap your hands a short distance from a large. and vocals all head outward from the stage at 340 m/s. Although not all waves have a speed that is independent of the shape of the wave. • The medium does not move with the sound. left to vibrate in interstellar space. the less eﬃciently the energy can be converted into sound and carried away. Sound travels faster in helium than in air. the reed of a saxophone. but scientiﬁcally wrong. we typically do it by creating vibrations of a physical object. and this property therefore is irrelevant to our collection of evidence that sound is a wave phenomenon. Putting more energy into the wave makes it more intense. the music in a large concert hall or stadium may take on the order of a second to reach someone seated in the nosebleed section. Bass. if we want to create a sound wave. For instance. rather than sideways vibrations like the shimmying of a 1 Outer space is not a perfect vacuum. regardless of their diﬀering wave shapes. sound does nevertheless have this property. not faster. 58 Chapter 3 Free Waves . and the delay of the echo is no shorter for a louder clap. and faster in water than in helium. but we do not notice or care. such as the sounding board of a guitar. However. and we can hear more than one sound at once if they both reach our ear simultaneously. or a speaker cone. would dissipate the energy of its vibration into internal heat at a rate many orders of magnitude greater than the rate of sound emission into the nearly perfect vacuum around it. since the speed of sound is diﬀerent in diﬀerent media.1 We can also tell that sound waves consist of compressions and expansions. drums. because the delay is the same for every sound. An isolated tuning fork.3. The lower the density of the surrounding medium. Further evidence is that we don’t receive sound signals that have come to our planet through outer space.3 Sound and Light Waves Sound waves The phenomenon of sound is easily found to have all the characteristics we expect from a wave phenomenon: • Sound waves obey superposition. For example. so it is possible for sounds waves to travel through it.
In fact. A vacuum is impenetrable to sound. For now. the study of matter.3 Sound and Light Waves 59 . and it is no longer believed to exist. which he called corpuscles (Latin for “small objects”). but light from the stars travels happily through zillions of miles of empty space. and they called it the aether (not to be confused with the chemical). It is now believed that both light and matter are made out of tiny chunks which have both wave and particle properties. The belief that matter was made of atoms was stylish at the time among radical thinkers (although there was no experimental evidence for their existence). when it was discovered that not all the phenomena of light could be explained with a pure wave theory. Section 3. the increase or decrease compared to normal atmospheric pressure is no more than a part per million. Our ears are apparently very sensitive receivers! Light waves Entirely similar observations lead us to believe that light is a wave. and it seemed logical to Newton that light as well should be made of tiny particles. Even if the corpuscles were extremely small. and collisions therefore very infrequent. from cameras to rainbows. For a long time. light can be explained as a wave pattern made up of electrical and magnetic ﬁelds. The wave theory of light was entirely successful up until the 20th century. although the concept of light as a wave had a long and tortuous history. at least some dimming should have been measurable. Instead. Supposedly the aether existed everywhere in space. If light is a wave. One persuasive proof that light is a wave is that according to Newton’s theory. i.e. what is waving? What is the medium that wiggles when a light wave goes by? It isn’t air. and was immune to vacuum pumps. Even for a very loud sound. Newton’s triumphs in the science of mechanics. The details of the story are more ﬁttingly reserved for later in this course. very delicate experiments have shown that there is no dimming. brought him such great prestige that nobody bothered to question his incorrect theory of light for 150 years. It is interesting to note that Isaac Newton very inﬂuentially advocated a contrary idea about light. but that doesn’t prevent the light waves from leaving the ﬁlament. two intersecting beams of light should experience at least some disruption because of collisions between their corpuscles. Only compressional vibrations would be able to cause your eardrums to vibrate in and out. physicists assumed that there must be a mysterious medium for light waves. which is capable of explaining a great many things. the compression is extremely weak. we will content ourselves with the wave theory of light. but the end result was that a long series of experiments failed to detect any evidence for the aether.snake.. Light bulbs have no air inside them.
there are infrared and radio waves. We have already deﬁned period and frequency for vibrations. red the lowfrequency end. i. It is not possible to sing a nonperiodic sound like “sh” with a deﬁnite pitch. are periodic.3. Many phenomena that we do not normally think of as light are actually just forms of light that are invisible because they fall outside the range of frequencies our eyes can detect. 60 Chapter 3 Free Waves . Past the violet end. light sound waves. The result is a graph whose horizontal axis is time. The period of a sound wave correlates with our sensory impression of musical pitch. Any wave can be represented in either way. Likewise we can deﬁne the period and frequency of a wave in terms of the period and frequency of the vibrations it causes. Taking the seismometer as an example.e. This visual snapshot amounts to a graph of the height of the water wave as a function of position. or seismic waves too small to be felt as a noticeable earthquake but detectable by a seismometer.” q / A strip chart recorder. and gamma rays. an obsolescing device consisting of a pen that wiggles back and forth as a roll of paper is fed under it.” p / A similar graph for a nonperiodic wave. The sounds that really deﬁne the musical notes of a song are only the ones that are periodic. it would also be a fullscale representation of the proﬁle of the actual o / A graph of pressure versus time for a periodic sound wave. Graphs of waves as a function of position Some waves. A color like brown that does not occur in a rainbow is not a periodic light wave. Beyond the red end of the visible rainbow. With a water wave. the vowel “ah. It can be used to record a person’s electrocardiogram. A high frequency (short period) is a high note. If the vibrations of the eardrum repeat themselves over and over. the chart is essentially a record of the ground’s wave motion as a function of time. As another example. it is simpler just to look at the wave directly. are easy to study by placing a detector at a certain location in space and studying the motion as a function of time. on the other hand. then we describe the sound wave that caused them as periodic.4 Periodic Waves Period and frequency of a periodic wave You choose a radio station by selecting a certain frequency.. Violet is the highfrequency end of the rainbow. this receiver could be an eardrum or a microphone. but what do they signify in the case of a wave? We can recycle our previous deﬁnition simply by stating it in terms of the vibrations that the wave causes as it passes a receiving instrument at a certain point in space. but if the paper was set to feed at the same velocity as the motion of an earthquake wave. “sh. we have ultraviolet. An easy way to visualize this is in terms of a strip chart recorder. xrays. For a sound wave. The frequency of a light wave corresponds to color. a periodic water wave would be one that caused a rubber duck to bob in a periodic manner as they passed by it.
Wave velocity related to frequency and wavelength Suppose that we create a repetitive disturbance by kicking the surface of a swimming pool.wave pattern itself. s / Wavelengths of linear and circular water waves. r / A water wave proﬁle created by a series of repeating pulses. and the time between pulses is the period. the Greek letter lambda.0 × 108 m/s. as is usually the case. This important and useful relationship is more commonly written in terms of the frequency. a station whose frequency is 88.4 Periodic Waves 61 . so the speed of the wave is the distance divided by the time. Wavelength is to space as period is to time. Wavelength Any wave that is periodic will also display a repeating pattern when graphed as a function of position. Assuming. The distance between pulses is λ. T . knowing the wave motion as a function of time is equivalent to knowing it as a function of position. v = λ/T . What is the wavelength of the radio waves emitted by KKJZ. Wavelength of radio waves example 5 The speed of light is 3.1 MHz? Section 3. The distance spanned by one repetition is referred to as one wavelength. that the wave velocity is a constant number regardless of the wave’s shape. The usual notation for wavelength is λ. v = fλ . The wavelength is simply the distance a pulse is able to travel before we make the next pulse. We are essentially making a series of wave pulses.
u / A water wave traveling into a region with a different depth changes its wavelength. i. (A more careful argument is that a kink or discontinuity would have inﬁnite curvature. was used to make this image of a fetus. An antenna optimized to receive KKJZ’s signal would have a length of 3. sound with frequencies higher than the range of human hearing. and waves tend to ﬂatten out their curvature. The frequency is now ﬁxed. which would be unphysical.85 m. An inﬁnite curvature would ﬂatten out inﬁnitely fast.. since details smaller than about one wavelength cannot be resolved. The speed of radio waves in air is almost exactly the same for all wavelengths and frequencies (it is exactly the same if they are in a vacuum). The equation v = f λ deﬁnes a ﬁxed relationship between any two of the variables if the other is held ﬁxed.1 × 106 s−1 ) = 3. because otherwise the two portions of the wave would otherwise get out of step. corresponding to a high frequency.0 × 108 m/s)/(88. i. The match need not be exact (since after all one antenna can receive more than one wavelength!). it could never occur in the ﬁrst place. so there is a ﬁxed relationship between their frequency and wavelength. Thus we can say either “Are we on the same wavelength?” or “Are we on the same frequency?” A diﬀerent example is the behavior of a wave that travels from a region where the medium has one set of properties to an area where the medium behaves diﬀerently.4 m/4 = 0. we have λ = v /f = (3.Solving for wavelength. causing a kink or discontinuity at the boundary. t / Ultrasound. High resolution therefore requires a short wavelength..e.) Since 62 Chapter 3 Free Waves .4 m The size of a radio antenna is closely related to the wavelength of the waves it is intended to receive. The resolution of the image is related to the wavelength.e. but the ordinary “whip” antenna such as a car’s is 1/4 of a wavelength.
Their bias is not unreasonable.2. A note on dispersive waves The discussion of wave velocity given here is actually an oversimpliﬁcation for a wave whose velocity depends on its frequency and wavelength. judge a color as pure (belonging to the rainbow set of colors) only if it is a sine wave. This is undoubtedly because our earbrain system evolved to be able to interpret human speech and animal noises. since the French mathematician Fourier showed that any periodic wave with frequency f can be constructed as a superposition of sine waves with frequencies f . we see that water waves that move into a region of diﬀerent depth must change their wavelength. many scientists and engineers would be uncomfortable with deﬁning a waveform like the “ah” vowel sound as having a deﬁnite frequency and wavelength. (Fourier’s result so surprised the mathematical community of France that he was ridiculed the ﬁrst time he publicly presented his theorem. resulting in a breaking wave. In fact. which are periodic but not sinusoidal. Our eyes. What will the superposition look like? What would this sound like if they were sound waves? Section 3. pure building blocks of all waves. but the issue becomes important in book 6 of this series. The velocity of water waves depends on the depth of the water. the tip of the wave can curl over.. as shown in the ﬁgure. Sinusoidal waves Sinusoidal waves are the most important special case of periodic waves. 3f . Such a wave is called a dispersive wave. In this sense. sine waves are the basic. Discussion Question A Suppose we superimpose two sine waves with equal amplitudes but slightly different frequencies. what deﬁnition to use is a matter of utility. on the other hand. as shown in the ﬁgure on the left. If the deceleration of the wave pattern is sudden enough.) However.4 Periodic Waves 63 .the frequency must stay the same. any change in the velocity that results from the new medium must cause a change in wavelength. Our sense of hearing perceives any two sounds having the same period as possessing the same pitch. This eﬀect can be observed when ocean waves come up to the shore. regardless of whether they are sine waves or not. because they consider only sine waves to be pure examples of a certain frequency and wavelengths. so based on λ = v/f . 2f .. where it is discussed in more detail in optional section 4. Nearly all the waves we deal with in this course are nondispersive. .
64 Chapter 3 Free Waves .
5 The Doppler Effect Figure v shows the wave pattern made by the tip of a vibrating rod which is moving across the water. Dopplershifted sound from a race car example 6 If a race car moves at a velocity of 50 m/s. but after it passes us we hear a frequency that is lower than normal. and to waves emitted either directly along or directly against the direction of motion. Note the shorter wavelength of the forwardemitted waves and the longer wavelength of the backwardgoing ones. and the velocity of sound is 340 m/s. Using the deﬁnition f = 1/T and the equation v = f λ. but with a plus sign rather than a minus sign. and lower for the ones emitted backward. This is known as the Doppler eﬀect. we can easily calculate the wavelength. For instance. v / The pattern of waves made by a point source moving to the right across the water. the wavelength is shortened on one side and lengthened on the other. But since the source of the waves is moving. and vs the velocity of the source.3. Restricting ourselves to the case of a moving source. we hear a higher pitch. because she has moved toward it and hastened her encounter with it. or equivalently the frequency. of the Dopplershifted waves. Let v be the velocity of the waves. Since the velocity is constant. A similar equation can be used for the backwardemitted waves. If the rod had been vibrating in one place. by what percentage are the wavelength and frequency of its sound waves shifted for an observer lying along its line of motion? Section 3. the Doppler eﬀect depends only the relative motion of the source and the observer. As the car approaches us. all centered on the same point. an observer moving toward a stationary source will perceive one crest of the wave. The Doppler eﬀect will also occur if the observer is moving but the source is stationary. so for example the forwardgoing waves do not get an extra boost in speed as would a material object like a bullet being shot forward from an airplane. not on their absolute state of motion (which is not a welldeﬁned notion in physics) or on their velocity relative to the medium. the equation v = f λ tells us that the change in wavelength must be matched by an opposite change in frequency: higher frequency for the waves emitted forward. The frequency Doppler eﬀect is the reason for the familiar droppingpitch sound of a race car going by.5 The Doppler Effect 65 . we would have seen the familiar pattern of concentric circles. The wavelength of the forwardemitted waves is shortened by an amount vs T equal to the distance traveled by the source over the course of one period. Note that the velocity of the waves is a ﬁxed property of the medium. and will then be surrounded by the next crest sooner than she otherwise would have. We can also infer a change in frequency. we ﬁnd for the wavelength of the Dopplershifted wave the equation λ = 1− vs λ v . Roughly speaking.
For an observer whom the car is approaching. and then it would get echoes from the ground. because if an airplane wanted to detect another airplane at a lower altitude.000017%. however. that the shifts just depend on the relative motion of the source and observer. On the other hand.85 = 1. a careful analysis of the Doppler shifts of water or sound waves shows that it is only approximately true.e. and this leads us to a story that has profound implications for our understanding of the origin of the universe.18. i. in which echoes from the ground were differentiated from echoes from other aircraft according to their Doppler shifts. we ﬁnd 1− vs = 0.e. v = 3. For instance. it is possible for a jet plane to keep up with its own sound waves. and buildings. but then there was a problem.. so that the sound waves appear to stand still to the pilot 66 Chapter 3 Free Waves . The second example shows that under ordinary earthbound circumstances. Since the frequency is inversely proportional to the wavelength for a ﬁxed value of the speed of sound. A Doppler radar image of Hurricane Katrina. the Doppler shifts of the wavelength and frequency are about the same. the percentage shift is only 0. Optional topic: Doppler shifts of light If Doppler shifts depend only on the relative motion of the source and receiver. then there is no way for a person moving with the source and another person moving with the receiver to determine who is moving and who isn’t. and detected the echoes when the waves were reﬂected from German planes. a change of 18%.99999983 .) Doppler shift of the light emitted by a race car example 7 What is the percent shift in the wavelength of the light waves emitted by a race car’s headlights? Looking up the speed of light in the front of the book. it would have to aim its radio waves downward. It’s a diﬀerent story. Either can blame the Doppler shift entirely on the other’s motion and claim to be at rest herself. in 2005. w / Example 8. at low speeds. A similar technology is used by meteorologists to map out rainclouds without being swamped by reﬂections from the ground.. (For velocities that are small compared to the wave velocities. Later.85 v . air forces wanted to mount radar antennas on airplanes. trees. 1− v i. Doppler radar example 8 The ﬁrst use of radar was by Britain during World War II: antennas on the ground sent radio waves up into the sky. the frequency is shifted upward by 1/0. we ﬁnd vs = 0. The solution was the invention of Doppler radar. This is entirely in agreement with the principle stated originally by Galileo that all motion is relative. Doppler shifts of light are negligible because ordinary things go so much slower than the speed of light.0 × 108 m/s. so the shift in wavelength is 15%. when it comes to stars and galaxies.
so there would be no collapse.. His solution to the problem was to posit a universe that was inﬁnite and uniformly populated with matter. the milky clouds reveal themselves to be composed of trillions of stars. The pilot then knows she is moving at exactly the speed of sound.of the plane. partly as a reaction against the time that had been wasted trying to ﬁnd explanations of ancient geological phenomena based on catastrophes suggested by biblical events like Noah’s ﬂood. In the 1920’s astronomer Edwin Hubble began studying the x / The galaxy M51. they began noticing certain objects that looked like clouds in deep space. the middle “star” of Orion’s sword. since light is not a vibration of any physical medium such as water or air. This opened up the scientiﬁc study of cosmology. By the 20th century. others were what we now call galaxies: virtual island universes consisting of trillions of stars (for example the Andromeda Galaxy. Not knowing what they really were. so that it would have no geometrical center. astronomers realized that the universe is made of galaxies of stars. the structure and history of the universe as a whole. but would not salvage the principle of relative motion in the case of light waves.5 The Doppler Effect 67 . In the early 20th century. As a consequence of this Theory of Relativity. which is visible as a fuzzy patch through binoculars). Einstein eventually came up with a radical new way of describing the universe. Beginning by imagining what a beam of light would look like to a person riding a motorcycle alongside it. Three hundred years after Galileo had resolved the Milky Way into individual stars through his telescope.” a Latin word meaning “clouds” but sounding more impressive. and the Milky Way is simply the visible part of the ﬂat disk of our own galaxy. Section 3. they called them “nebulae. seen from inside. not just approximately. a ﬁeld that had not been seriously attacked since the days of Newton. he showed that light waves would have Doppler shifts that would exactly. The Big Bang As soon as astronomers began looking at the sky through telescopes. the belief in an unchanging and inﬁnite universe had become conventional wisdom in science. The gravitational forces in such a universe would always tend to cancel out by symmetry. but wanting to sound oﬃcial. the universe would have a tendency to collapse. never repulsive.g. which is visibly fuzzy even to the naked eye when conditions are good). Newton had realized that if gravity was always attractive. astronomers realized that although some really were clouds of gas (e. The fact that they looked the same night after night meant that they were beyond the earth’s atmosphere. in which space and time are distorted as measured by observers in different states of motion. Einstein realized that this solved the problem for sound or water waves. Under high magniﬁcation. depend only on the relative motion of the source and receiver. The reason this doesn’t disprove the relativity of motion is that the pilot is not really determining her absolute motion but rather her motion relative to the air. which is the medium of the sound waves.
of all the pure sinusoidal waves with wavelengths lying in the visible range. It is not an explanation of why the universe exists. and we can even detect the radiation from this early ﬁreball. Sirius is in our own galaxy. Not only that.y / How do astronomers know what mixture of wavelengths a star emitted originally.e. while an equal number would be expected to have red shifts. Furthermore. and today essentially all astronomers accept the Big Bang theory based on the very direct evidence of the red shifts and the cosmic microwave background radiation. (If you have the book in black and white. The farther apart two raisins are.” These are the ﬁngerprint of hydrogen in the outer atmosphere of Sirius. When astronomers began to study the Doppler shifts of galaxies. Mount 68 Chapter 3 Free Waves . His autobiography seldom even mentions the cosmological discovery for which he is now remembered. Extrapolating backward in time using the known laws of physics. even among many scientists. there is an unfortunate tendency. Hubble did not set out to change our image of the beginning of the universe.) The star appears white or bluishwhite to the eye. the universe must have been denser and denser at earlier and earlier times. which caused everything after it. it must have been extremely dense and hot. What Hubble discovered instead was that except for a few very nearby ones. and their light would therefore be Dopplershifted to the blue end of the spectrum. because Doppler shifts of light only depend on the relative motion of the source and the observer. and no telescope) shows the mixture of colors emitted by the star Sirius. If we see a distant galaxy moving away from us at 10% of the speed of light. but ultimately science takes the universe as it is according to observations. but it stuck. The speeds were directly proportional to their distance from us. indicating they are moving away from us. Science can ﬁnd ever simpler and ever more fundamental explanations for a variety of phenomena. At some point. Note the black “gap teeth. i. all the galaxies had red shifts. What the big bang is not Finally it should be noted what the Big Bang theory is not. the greater the speed with which they move apart. but the ones farther away were receding more quickly. As the bread expands. in the form of microwave radiation that permeates space. Such questions belong to the realm of religion. there is more and more space between the raisins. Did this mean that the earth (or at least our galaxy) was the center of the universe? No. The whole universe can be envisioned as a rising loaf of raisin bread. Doppler shifts of the light emitted by galaxies. The phrase Big Bang was originally coined by the doubters of the theory to make it sound ridiculous. indicating that they were receding from us at a hefty fraction of the speed of light. but any light looks white if it contains roughly an equal mixture of the rainbow colors. Some would be approaching us. the methods z / The telescope at Wilson used by Hubble.. Although it is true that time may have had a beginning (Einstein’s theory of general relativity admits such a possibility). not science. but similar stars in other galaxies would have the whole pattern shifted toward the red end. so that they can tell how much the Doppler shift was? This image (obtained by the author with equipment costing about $5. they expected that each galaxy’s direction and velocity of motion would be essentially random. blue is on the left and red on the right. These wavelengths are selectively absorbed by hydrogen. A former college football player with a serious nicotine addiction. to speak of the Big Bang theory as a description of the very ﬁrst event in the universe. we can be assured that the astronomers who live in that galaxy will see ours receding from them at the same speed in the opposite direction.
forming a cloud. when these temperatures existed. but not to its own bullets? C If someone inside a plane is talking to you. we will never be able to describe nature at inﬁnitely high temperatures. beyond about 1033 degrees. should their speech be Doppler shifted? aa / Shock waves from by the X15 rocket plane. which encompasses Newtonian physics as a special case. physicists know that Einstein’s theory as well begins to fall apart. Section 3. Discussion Questions A If an airplane travels at exactly the speed of sound. but we cannot use the methods of science to deal with the beginning of time itself. the random thermal motion of subatomic particles becomes so rapid that its velocity is comparable to the speed of light. and what would actually happen? What happens if it’s going faster than the speed of sound? Can you use this to explain what you see in ﬁgures aa and ab? B If bullets go slower than the speed of sound. We are conﬁdent that we understand the basic physics involved in the evolution of the universe starting a few minutes after the Big Bang. Newtonian physics becomes less accurate. what would be the wavelength of the forwardemitted part of the sound waves it emitted? How should this be interpreted. Beyond a temperature of about 109 degrees C. The sudden decompression of the air causes water droplets to condense.of science can only work within a certain range of conditions such as temperature and density.5 The Doppler Effect 69 . At even higher temperatures. ﬂying at 3. ab / This ﬁghter jet has just accelerated past the speed of sound. and we must describe nature using the more general description given by Einstein’s theory of relativity. Early enough in the history of the universe. but we don’t know how to construct the even more general theory of nature that would work at those temperatures. and we may be able to push back to milliseconds or microseconds after it.5 times the speed of sound. since there is a limit to the temperatures we can explore by experiment and observation in order to guide us to the right theory. No matter how far physics progresses. why can a supersonic ﬁghter plane catch up to its own sound.
A wave emitted by a moving source will be shifted in wavelength and frequency. The velocity. . . not a steady forward motion. Summary Wave motion diﬀers in three important ways from the motion of material objects: (1) Waves obey the principle of superposition. Light is a wave. When two waves collide. (3) The velocity of a wave depends on the medium. the adding together of waves that overlap with each other medium . . the velocity may also depend on the shape of the wave. . they simply add together.Summary Selected Vocabulary superposition . (For some types of waves. . which is the distance in space between repetitions of the wave pattern. notably water waves. frequency. and it will also have a wavelength. (2) The medium is not transported along with the wave. . Such a wave has a welldeﬁned period and frequency. . The shifted wavelength is given by the equation λ = 1− vs λ v . wavelength (Greek letter lambda) where v is the velocity of the waves and vs is the velocity of the source. . . A periodic wave is one that creates a periodic motion in a receiver as it passes it.) Sound waves consist of increases and decreases (typically very small ones) in the density of the air. a physical substance whose vibrations constitute a wave wavelength . The motion of any given point in the medium is a vibration about its equilibrium location. . . the distance in space between repetitions of a periodic wave Doppler eﬀect . the change in a wave’s frequency and wavelength due to the motion of the source or the observer or both Notation λ. but it is a vibration of electric and magnetic ﬁelds. A similar shift occurs if the observer 70 Chapter 3 Free Waves . . . not on the amount of energy in the wave. taken to be positive or negative so as to produce a Dopplerlengthened wavelength if the source is receding and a Dopplershortened one if it approaches. . . Light can travel through a vacuum. . and wavelength of a periodic wave are related by the equation v = f λ. . not of any physical medium. .
(This is not just approximately but exactly true for light waves.is moving. and this fact forms the basis of Einstein’s Theory of Relativity.) Summary 71 . and in general the Doppler shift depends approximately only on the relative motion of the source and observer if their velocities are both small compared to the waves’ velocity.
There is more than one point whose velocity is of the greatest magnitude. (c) Now assume the original graph was of height as a function of time. Do the same for a point having the maximum magnitude of acceleration.] 3 The ﬁgure shows one wavelength of a steady sinusoidal wave traveling to the right along a string. [Problem by Arnold Arons.] 2 (a) The graph shows the height of a water wave pulse as a function of position. (b) the frequency and velocity were both doubled while the amplitude remained unchanged. Deﬁne a coordinate system in which the positive x axis points to the right and the positive y axis up. Problem 2. at a certain moment in time. label with v = 0 all parts of the string whose velocities are zero. but assume the pulse is traveling to the left. [Problem by Arnold Arons. Problem 3. and label with y = 0 all the appropriate parts of the string. such that the ﬂattened string would have y = 0. Trace this graph onto another piece of paper. and with a = 0 all parts whose accelerations are zero. Pick one of these. Draw a graph of height as a function of time for a speciﬁc point on the water. and indicate the direction of its velocity vector. A diﬃcult problem. A problem that requires calculus. and then sketch below it the corresponding graphs that would be obtained if (a) the amplitude and frequency were doubled while the velocity remained the same. (b) Repeat part a. Copy the ﬁgure. (c) the wavelength and amplitude were reduced by a factor of three while the velocity was doubled.Problems Key √ A computerized answer check is available online. Similarly. 1 The following is a graph of the height of a water wave as a function of position. and draw a graph of height as a function of position. assuming the pulse is traveling to the right. but assume the pulse is traveling to the left. 72 Chapter 3 Free Waves . Assume the pulse is traveling to the right. (d) Repeat part c.
we saw that the speed of waves on a string depends on the ratio of T /µ. and less if it has more inertia.e. resistance to compression. How fast would a singer have to be moving relative to a the rest of a band to make this much of a change in pitch due to the Doppler √ eﬀect? 8 In section 3. This is true in general: the speed of a mechanical wave always depends on the medium’s inertia in relation to the restoring force (tension.) Based on these ideas.. while the speed of sounds in liquids and solids does not. the speed of the wave is greater if the string is under more tension. Make it simple and practical. explain why the speed of sound in a gas depends strongly on temperature. for the case of a stationary observer and a source moving directly toward or away from the observer..2. i. Problems 73 . 6 The musical note middle C has a frequency of 262 Hz.] 4 Find an equation for the relationship between the Dopplershifted frequency of a wave and the frequency of the original wave...[Problem by Arnold Arons. 5 Suggest a quantitative experiment to look for any deviation from the principle of superposition for surface waves in water. What √ are its period and wavelength? 7 Singing that is oﬀpitch by more than about 1% sounds bad. stiﬀness.
74 Chapter 3 Free Waves .
and head. the human experiments with the production of complex speech sounds. 75 . Chapter 4 Bounded Waves Speech is what separates humans most decisively from animals. No other species can master syntax. we have been studying only those properties of waves that can be understood as if they existed in an inﬁnite. and even though chimpanzees can learn a vocabulary of hand signs. In this chapter we address what happens when a wave is conﬁned within a certain space. How do we do control sound waves so skillfully? Mostly we do it by changing the shape of a connected set of hollow cavities in our chest.A crosssectional view of a human body. Up until now. throat. Somehow by moving the boundaries of this space in and out. as when a light wave moving through air encounters a glass windowpane. or when a wave pattern encounters the boundary between two diﬀerent media. there is an unmistakable diﬀerence between a human infant and a baby chimp: starting from birth. we seldom think about them consciously. we can produce all the vowel sounds. showing the vocal tract. Since speech sounds are instinctive for us. open space.
from underwater. since we would expect the light waves to burst forth to freedom in the wideopen air. You see your own reﬂection. which must go one way or the other. Looking out through a window. The reﬂection is the one on top. We use the word reﬂection. A material projectile shot up toward the surface would never rebound from the waterair 76 Chapter 4 Bounded Waves . normally applied only to light waves in ordinary speech.a / A diver photographed this ﬁsh. as in ﬁgure c. and there are some surprises in store. After all. and light waves are reﬂected from the surface of a pond. This is utterly counterintuitive. not both. we will concentrate mainly on reﬂection of waves that move in one dimension. This is diﬀerent from the behavior of the rubber ball. Wave reﬂection does not surprise us. Figure b shows a circular water wave being reﬂected from a straight wall. 4. and its reﬂection. a material object such as a rubber ball would bounce back in the same way. consider what you see if you are swimming underwater and you look up at the surface.1 Reﬂection. In this chapter. to describe any such case of a wave rebounding from a barrier. and Absorption Reﬂection and transmission Sound waves can echo back from a cliﬀ. but a person standing outside would also be able to see her reﬂection in the glass. The energy of the original wave is split between the two. we see light waves that passed through it. Transmission. and is formed by light waves that went up to the surface of the water. First. But waves are not objects. only part of the wave is usually reﬂected. A light wave that strikes the glass is partly reﬂected and partly transmitted (passed) by the glass. Second. but were then reﬂected back down into the water.
the speed of light waves in window glass is about 30% less than in air. which explains why windows always make reﬂections. Figures d/1 and 2 show examples of wave pulses being reﬂected at the boundary between two coil springs of diﬀerent weights. is like a more extreme version of example d/1. the reﬂected pulse is upsidedown. Longdistance radio communication. and the ionosphere. If the heavy coil spring in d/1 was made heavier and heavier. and still be detectable. but this might be confusing. the atmosphere. 100 c / A wave on a spring. but the three media involved are the earth.boundary! Figure a shows a similar example. noise pollution from ships has nearly shut down this cetacean version of the internet. Reﬂections such as b and c. Transmission.1 Reﬂection. The sound waves can travel hundreds of miles. 100 Fish have internal ears. A wave is partially reﬂected and partially transmitted at the boundary between media in which it has diﬀerent speeds. and air. for instance. p. example 3 Radio communication can occur between stations on opposite sides of the planet. but its depth is just as big as the original pulse’s height. can usually be understood on the same basis as cases like d/1 and 2 later in his section. example 1 Why don’t ﬁsh have earholes? The speed of sound waves in a ﬁsh’s body is not much different from their speed in water. The use of the word “reﬂection” naturally brings to mind the creation of an image by a mirror. water. so ﬁsh can have internal ears. where two media meet. and Absorption 77 . it would end up acting like the ﬁxed wall to which the light spring in c has been attached. selfcheck B Sonar is a method for ships and submarines to detect each other by producing sound waves and listening for echoes. They pass right through its body. because we do not normally refer to “reﬂection” when we look at surfaces Section 4. b / Circular water waves are reﬂected from a boundary on the left. Whale songs traveling long distances example 2 Sound waves travel at drastically different speeds through rock. so sound waves are not strongly reﬂected from a ﬁsh’s skin. What is it about the diﬀerence between two media that causes waves to be partly reﬂected at the boundary between them? Is it their density? Their chemical composition? Ultimately all that matters is the speed of the wave in the two media. Example c. selfcheck A In ﬁgure c. initially traveling to the left. Sadly. Whale songs are thus strongly reﬂected at both the bottom and the surface. where a wave encounters a massive ﬁxed object. bouncing repeatedly between the bottom and the surface. What properties would an underwater object have to have in order to be invisible to sonar? Answer. For example. in which the wave speed is diﬀerent. The mechanism is similar to the one explained in example 2. How does the energy of the reﬂected pulse compare with that of the original? Answer. p. is reﬂected from the ﬁxed end.
Nevertheless. we are actually seeing the reﬂecting of the sun from the concrete. A wave in the lighter spring. reﬂection is how we see the surfaces of all objects. Inverted and uninverted reﬂections Notice how the pulse reﬂected back to the right in example d/1 comes back upsidedown. A wave moving to the right in the heavier spring is partly reﬂected at the boundary with the lighter spring. d / 1.that are not shiny. which has a lower wave speed. When we look at a sidewalk. The reﬂection is inverted. The reﬂection is uninverted. travels to the left and is then partly reﬂected and partly transmitted at the boundary with the heavier coil spring. for example. 2. where the wave speed is greater. not just polished ones. whereas the one reﬂected back to the left 78 Chapter 4 Bounded Waves . The reason we don’t see an image of the sun at our feet is simply that the rough surface blurs the image so drastically.
This can be proven as follows. for instance. dissipate into heat extremely slowly. In reality. then after traveling another meter it will have an amplitude of 1/2. In general. which could never escape into the vacuum of outer space. 2. it loses energy. so it is still ahead when it starts back to the left — it’s just that “ahead” is now in the opposite direction. a reﬂection back into a faster medium and a reﬂection back into a slower medium. If a single amplitude1 wave would die down to amplitude 1/2 over a certain distance. selfcheck C As a wave undergoes absorption. sound waves. there are two possible types of reﬂections. and vibrations of matter always produce heat. During this time it has traveled over a kilometer! Even this very gradual dissipation of energy occurs mostly as heating of the church’s walls and by the Section 4. f / A pulse traveling through a highly absorptive medium.. The reﬂected pulse will always be reversed front to back. the reduction in amplitude is exponential. We can thus expect that in mechanical waves such as water waves. and Absorption 79 . That is. if a wave decreases from amplitude 2 to amplitude 1 over a distance of 1 meter. 100 e / 1. It’s important to realize that when we discuss inverted and uninverted reﬂections on a string. and is not converted to any other form. The reﬂected pulse is reversed front to back. This is because it is traveling in the other direction. then the world would become more and more full of sound waves. p. then two amplitude1 waves superposed on top of one another to make amplitude 1 + 1 = 2 must die down to amplitude 1/2 + 1/2 = 1 over the same distance. this frictional heating eﬀect is quite weak. One type will always be an inverting reﬂection and one noninverting. as when you bend a coathangar back and forth and it becomes hot. upsidedown in these drawings). the wave energy will gradually be converted into heat. or waves on a string. An uninverted reﬂection. we know that a wave of amplitude 2 must behave like the superposition of two identical waves of amplitude 1. as shown in ﬁgure f. as shown in ﬁgure e. This is referred to as absorption. The decrease in amplitude amounts to the same fractional change for each unit of distance covered. This is true for other waves as well. By the principle of superposition. The leading edge of the pulse is what gets reﬂected ﬁrst.in 2 returns in its original upright form. The wave suﬀers a decrease in amplitude. Absorption So far we have tacitly assumed that wave energy remains as wave energy.1 Reﬂection. any mechanical wave consists of a traveling pattern of vibrations of some physical medium. Sound waves in air. In many cases. An inverted reﬂection. Does this mean that it slows down? Answer.e. If this was true. and the sound of church music in a cathedral may reverberate for as much as 3 or 4 seconds before it becomes inaudible. For example. The reﬂected pulse is reversed both front to back and top to bottom. but is not upsidedown. we are talking about whether the wave is ﬂipped across the direction of motion (i. Transmission.
die out extremely rapidly compared to ripples on water. A better strategy for soundprooﬁng is to create a sandwich of alternating layers of materials in which the speed of sound is very different. Soundprooﬁng example 4 Typical amateur musicians setting out to soundproof their garages tend to think that they should simply cover the walls with the densest possible substance. In fact. Water is a very weak absorber of sound (viz. For sound waves and surface waves in liquids and gases.leaking of sound to the outside (where it will eventually end up as heat). while its speed in ﬁberglass is essentially the same as its speed in air. and be assured that none of its light was absorbed in the vacuum of outer space during its 9year journey to us. Ripples on the surface of antifreeze. but sound waves passing through a few inches of them are still not going to be absorbed sufﬁciently. which is what matters. due to its stiffness. 1014 km away from us. a sound wave in a straight pipe could theoretically travel hundreds of kilometers before being noticeably attenuated. The speed of sound in plywood is very high. Due to all the backandforth motion. is often located right next to the ﬁsh’s ear. In general. to encourage reﬂection. Of course the energy of light can be dissipated if it does pass through matter (and the light from distant galaxies is often absorbed if there happen to be clouds of gas or dust in between). rather than its low viscosity. and our incorrect intuition arises from focusing on the wrong property of the substance: water’s high density. whether it ﬂows easily like water or mercury or more sluggishly like molasses or antifreeze. and will bounce back and forth many times like a ping pong ball. since although it can travel through matter. whale songs and sonar). what matters is the viscosity of the substance. Thus we can look at the star Sirius. Both materials are fairly good sound absorbers. but weakly by ﬂesh. The point of combining them is that a sound wave that tries to get out will be strongly reﬂected at each of the ﬁberglassplywood boundaries. This is the equivalent of having ten times the thickness of soundabsorbing material. which is irrelevant. g / Xrays are light waves with a very high frequency. the absorption of mechanical waves depends a great deal on the chemical composition and microscopic structure of the medium. for instance. billions of years ago. the sound may end up traveling a total distance equal to ten times the actual thickness of the soundprooﬁng before it escapes. it is not itself a vibration of any material substance. The Hubble Space Telescope routinely observes light that has been on its way to us since the early history of the universe. This explains why our intuitive expectation of strong absorption of sound in water is incorrect. Under the right conditions (humid air and low frequency). The swim bladder example 5 The swim bladder of a ﬁsh. They are absorbed strongly by bones. i. Light is an interesting case..e. sound is not absorbed very strongly even by passing through several inches of wood. As dis 80 Chapter 4 Bounded Waves . which was ﬁrst discussed in homework problem 2 in chapter 2. The classic design is alternating layers of ﬁberglass and plywood.
with the gasﬁlled swim bladder playing the role of the lowdensity material. How would its energy and frequency compare with those of the original sound? Would it sound any different? What happens if you swap the two wires where they connect to a stereo speaker. If the waves bounce back and forth many times between the ampliﬁer and the antenna. Partial reﬂection then becomes irrelevant. Discussion Question A A sound wave that underwent a pressureinverting reﬂection would have its compressions converted to expansions and vice versa. resulting in waves that vibrate in the opposite way? Section 4. since all the wave energy will eventually exit through the antenna. this minimizes the amount of reﬂection. must have a length of wire or cable connecting the ampliﬁer to the antenna. Transmission. and there will therefore be partial reﬂection of the waves as they come from the cable to the antenna. so it’s actually difﬁcult to get any of the sound wave energy to deposit itself in the ﬁsh so that the ﬁsh can hear it! The physics here is almost exactly the same as the physics of example 4 above.cussed in example 1 on page 77. a great deal of their energy will be absorbed. such as a commercial station or an amateur “ham” radio station. One possibility is to design the antenna so that the speed of the waves in it is as close as possible to the speed of the waves in the cable. The cable and the antenna act as two different media for radio waves.1 Reﬂection. There are two ways to attack the problem. and Absorption 81 . the ﬁsh’s body is nearly transparent to sound. Radio transmission example 6 A radio transmitting station. The other method is to connect the ampliﬁer to the antenna using a type of wire or cable that does not strongly absorb the waves.
but not stationary kinks. because the medium tends to accelerate in such a way as to eliminate curvature. If the wave progresses from a heavier portion of the string. But there is still something unphysical about ﬁgure 2. but the Newtonian universe is supposed to be deterministic. we normally assume (but seldom prove formally) that the equations of motion have a unique solution.) Does this amount to a proof that reﬂection occurs? Not quite. but all readers are encouraged at least to skim the ﬁrst two subsections for physical insight. let’s ﬁrst discuss what doesn’t happen. we prove that a valid solution can always be found in which a reﬂection occurs. and (2) no sudden changes in the slope of the wave. This can’t really happen. we cannot simultaneously satisfy the requirements of (1) continuity of the wave. consider a sinusoidal wave on a string. to a lighterweight part. since otherwise a given set of initial conditions could lead to diﬀerent behavior later on. If only the frequency changed. we will have ended up with what amounts h / 1. We have only proven that certain types of wave motion are not valid solutions. Why reﬂection occurs To understand the fundamental reasons for what does occur at the boundary between media. then the parts of the wave in the two diﬀerent portions of the string would quickly get out of step with each other. h/1.2 Quantitative Treatment of Reﬂection In this optional section we analyze the reasons why reﬂections occur at a speedchanging boundary. 2.4. Since the solution must be unique. A simple change in wavelength without a reﬂection would result in a sharp kink in the wave. (The student who has studied calculus will recognize this as amounting to an assumption that both the wave and its derivative are continuous functions. In the following subsection. The gory details are likely to be of interest mainly to students with concentrations in the physical sciences. which would produce an inﬁnite acceleration. A change in frequency without a change in wavelength would produce a discontinuity in the wave. This is unphysical. 2. and discuss how to predict for any type of wave which reﬂections are inverting and which are noninverting. so we know that the wavelength must change while the frequency remains constant. then the equation v = f λ tells us that it must change its frequency. predict quantitatively the intensities of reﬂection and transmission. or both. or its wavelength. in which it is high. producing a discontinuity in the wave. A sharp kink corresponds to an inﬁnite curvature at one point. 82 Chapter 4 Bounded Waves . and we derive below a valid solution involving a reﬂected pulse. Now in physics. Waves can have kinks. The sudden change in the shape of the wave has resulted in a sharp kink at the boundary. which would not be consistent with the smooth pattern of wave motion envisioned in ﬁgure 2. We conclude that without positing partial reﬂection of the wave. in which its velocity is low. For the sake of concreteness.
The top drawing shows the pulse heading to the right.to a proof of reﬂection. but is also changed by the stretching or compression of the wave due to the change in speed. in the case of waves on a string. Next we turn to the requirement of equal slopes on both sides of the boundary. The slope on the right is therefore s(v1 /v2 )T . Solving the two equations for the unknowns R and T gives R= v2 − v1 v2 + v1 and T = 2v2 v2 + v1 . it adds together with the trailing parts of the incident pulse. On the right. Equality of slopes gives s − sR = s(v1 /v2 )T . shown as a wider line. that it is possible to satisfy the physical requirements given above by constructing a reﬂected wave. In general. the incident wave had double this amplitude. and as a bonus this will produce an equation for the proportions of reﬂection and transmission and a prediction as to which conditions will lead to inverted and which to uninverted reﬂection. the transmitted wave has a height T . and the slopes of the superposed waves on the left side add up to s − sR. or 1−R= v1 T v2 . all but the ﬁrst and last drawings are schematic. i / A pulse being partially reﬂected and partially transmitted at the boundary between two strings in which the speed of waves is different. for instance. where v1 is the velocity in the original medium and v2 the velocity in the new medium. For clarity. Section 4. then the slope is cut in half by this eﬀect.2 Quantitative Treatment of Reﬂection 83 . We can without loss of generality take the incident (original) wave to have unit amplitude. we must have 1+R=T . which is a good approximations for waves on a string of suﬃciently small amplitude. To avoid a discontinuity. the slope depends on the amplitude. Let the slope of the incoming wave be s immediately to the left of the junction. the slope of the reﬂected wave equals −sR. toward the heavier string. is what is actually observed. Their sum. the height of the wave is given by the height 1 of the incident wave. for example. we could immediately ﬁnd a corresponding solution simply by doubling R and T . On the right side immediately next to the boundary. An inverted reﬂection would be represented by a negative value of R. We assume only that the principle of superposition holds. Once the reﬂected pulse begins to emerge from the boundary. Intensity of reﬂection We will now show. Superposition tells us that if. since the wave has been reversed in direction. respectively. Just to the left of the boundary. If. the wave speed is twice as great on the right side. T . If the wave was 100% reﬂected. plus the height R of the part of the reﬂected wave that has just been created and begun heading back. for a total height of 1 + R. and without inversion. Let the unknown amplitudes of the reﬂected and transmitted waves be R and T . then the slope of the reﬂected wave would be −s.
and the transmitted pulse is broader and less strongly curved. Now let’s consider reﬂections. starting a chain reaction that travels backward down the freeway as each person in turn exercises caution in order to avoid rearending anyone. i. Although I don’t know any physical situation that would j / A disturbance trafﬁc.The ﬁrst equation shows that there is no reﬂection unless the two wave speeds are diﬀerent. but it occurs throughout the medium. Likewise many other types of waves can be described by either of two functions.. Now if a wave is touched oﬀ by a person tapping the brakes. The energies of the transmitted and reﬂected wavers always add up to the same as the energy of the original wave. the highdensity area will still appear high in density. reducing its kinetic energy. The reason why this type of wave is relevant is that it gives a simple. we can either describe it as a region of high density or as a region of decreasing velocity. easily visualized example of our description of a wave depends on which aspect of the wave we have in mind. Let’s start by considering wave disturbances of freeway traﬃc. one of which is often the derivative of the other with respect to position. Is this true for all types of waves? The rather subtle answer is that it depends on what property of the wave you are discussing. reﬂections back into a faster medium are inverted. The freeway traﬃc wave is in fact a good model of a sound wave. in freeway 84 Chapter 4 Bounded Waves . we say that there is no wave. because this occurs when the second string is less massive. Since there is no disturbance in this pattern of constant velocity and density. Anyone who has driven frequently on crowded freeways has observed the phenomenon in which one driver taps the brakes. Inverted and uninverted reﬂections in general For waves on a string. This does not violate conservation of energy. but the velocity graph will be ﬂipped across the x axis. A person observing the mirror image will draw the same density graph. both the density of cars and their velocity are constant all along the road. and its original region of negative slope will now have positive slope. surprisingly.) The equation for T . while those back into a slower medium are uninverted. greater than that of the incident wave. and that the reﬂection is inverted in reﬂection back into a fast medium. but velocity in the opposite direction will now be described by a negative number. If we observe the freeway wave in a mirror. There is never any abrupt loss (or gain) in energy when a wave crosses a boundary. In steadily ﬂowing freeway traﬃc. which lessens its potential energy. allows the amplitude of the transmitted wave to be greater than 1.e. and a sound wave can likewise be described either by the density (or pressure) of the air or by its speed. (Conversion of wave energy to heat occurs for many types of waves.
by the way one’s hair stands on end. magnetic ﬁelds do not reverse themselves in a mirror image. so the electric ﬁeld is apparently reversed in a mirror image. which often do get reﬂected. say from clockwise to counterclockwise. In a mirror image. stay the same. In the other. for example. is a little tricky. and to apply the analogy we need only determine which quantities. This same type of situation will occur over and over as one encounters new types of waves. like velocity. are caused by the aligned rotation of the outermost orbiting electrons of the atoms. the electric ﬁeld is uninverted and the magnetic ﬁeld inverted. In a mirror image. you don’t need to know any of the detailed physics of electricity and magnetism. the hair points the other way.correspond to the reﬂection of a traﬃc wave. however. The direction of the hair indicates the direction of the electric ﬁeld. and so the magnetic ﬁeld is reversed twice: once simply because the whole picture is ﬂipped and once because of the reversed rotation of the electrons. The behavior of magnetic ﬁelds. for instance consists of a traveling pattern of electric and magnetic ﬁelds. In other words. In one. A light wave. All you need to know in order to analyze the reﬂection of light waves is how electric and magnetic ﬁelds behave under reﬂection. for instance. The magnetic properties of a bar magnet. the electric ﬁeld is inverted and the magnetic ﬁeld uninverted. become negated in a mirror image and which. Section 4. we can immediately apply the same reasoning to sound waves. We can thus predict that there will be two possible types of reﬂection of light waves.2 Quantitative Treatment of Reﬂection 85 . like density. An electric ﬁeld can be detected. the direction of rotation is reversed. and determine that a reﬂection can either be densityinverting and velocitynoninverting or densitynoninverting and velocityinverting.
This is advertised as a coating to prevent reﬂection. Partial reﬂection and partial transmission will occur at each boundary. The coating can’t change the speed of light in air or in glass. and this will rattle back and forth. of the two reﬂected pulses in 4. The ﬁrst two waves to reemerge on the left could be in phase. and a wave pattern consisting initially of a single pulse. m/1. we have a threelayer sandwich of materials: air. The only k / Seen from this angle. a faster medium. are superimposed. Now reﬂection is clearly undesirable — we want the light to go in the binoculars — but so far I’ve described reﬂection as an unalterable fact of nature. Figure l/1 shows the incident pulse moving through the heavy rope. (The color varies depending on the angle from which the coating is viewed. (The transmitted pulse is bigger.3 Interference Effects If you look at the front of a pair of highquality binoculars. Now let’s imagine what would have happened if the incoming wave pattern had been a long sinusoidal wave train instead of a single pulse. There are two diﬀerent interfaces between media: an aircoating boundary and a coatingglass boundary. In other words. In ﬁgure 4. Visible light from most sources does consist of a stream of short sinusoidal wavetrains such as the ones drawn above. One underwent reﬂection at the ﬁrst boundary (a reﬂection back into a slower medium is uninverted).4.) l / A rope consisting of three sections. If we choose the width of the middle string segment correctly. For ease of visualization let’s start by considering an equivalent system consisting of three dissimilar pieces of string tied together. you will notice a greenishblue coating on the lenses. m / Two reﬂections. and a single pulse is heading oﬀ to the right. one is inverted and one uninverted. 3. coating.) Note how.) The pulse transmitted by the ﬁrst interface is then partially reﬂected and partially transmitted by the second boundary. or anywhere in between. rapidly getting too weak to detect as it leaks energy to the outside with each partial reﬂection. it is partially reﬂected and partially transmitted. depending only on the properties of the two wave media. (There is still a weak pulse caught between the two boundaries. and glass. but nevertheless has only part of the original energy. or out of phase. One reﬂection is inverted. 2. The amount of lag between them depends entirely on the width of the middle segment of string. 2. We will analyze the way the coating works. but the other was reﬂected at the second boundary (reﬂection back into a faster medium is inverted). not because optical coatings are an important part of your education but because it provides a good example of the general phenomenon of wave interference eﬀects. 86 Chapter 4 Bounded Waves . the optical coating on the lenses of these binoculars appears purple and green. two pulses are on the way back out to the left. and the angle varies across the faces of the lenses because of their curvature. in which its velocity is low. then we can arrange for destructive interference to occur. the middle one being lighter. with cancellation resulting in a very weak reﬂected wave. so how can it work? The key is that the coating itself is a wave medium. This whole analysis applies directly to our original case of optical coatings. When it encounters the lighterweight rope in the middle.
The example of an optical coating was typical of a wide variety of wave interference eﬀects. displays Discussion Questions A Is it possible to get complete destructive interference in an optical coating. The business of optical coatings turns out to be a very arcane one. With a little guidance. a layer of oil on a puddle. 100 n / A soap bubble interference effects. The selfcheck and discussion questions will direct you along these lines of thought. What happens if you try to make an optical coating thicker than this? C Suppose you take two microscope slides and lay one on top of the other so that one of its edges is resting on the corresponding edge of the bottom one. How can you explain the rainbow colors on the soap bubble in ﬁgure n? Answer. What would you expect to see if the slides were illuminated from above by light of a single color? How would this change if you gradually lifted the lower edge of the top slide until the two slides were ﬁnally parallel? D An observation like the one described in the previous discussion question was used by Newton as evidence against the wave theory of light! If Newton didn’t know about inverting and noninverting reﬂections. the general result is the same as long as the air and the glass have lightwave speeds that either both greater than the coating’s or both less than the coating’s. what would have seemed inexplicable to him about the region where the air layer had zero or nearly zero thickness? Section 4. Nevertheless. the ideas you have learned about waves in general are suﬃcient to allow you to come to some deﬁnite conclusions without any further technical knowledge. for a length of something like a tenth of a millimeter. selfcheck D 1. or a soap bubble. Is it possible to choose a thickness for an optical coating that will produce destructive interference for all colors of light? 2.3 Interference Effects 87 . with a thickness that changes gradually from one end to the other. in which light does not have the same speed. with a plethora of trade secrets and “black magic” techniques handed down from master to apprentice. Color corresponds to wavelength of light waves. However.real diﬀerence between the wavesonarope example and the case of an optical coating is that the ﬁrst and third media are air and glass. p. at least for light of one speciﬁc wavelength? B Sunlight consists of sinusoidal wavetrains containing on the order of a hundred cycles backtoback. you are now ready to ﬁgure out for yourself other examples such as the rainbow pattern made by a compact disc. If you insert a sliver of paper or a hair at the opposite end. a wedgeshaped layer of air will exist in the middle.
(The string has too little crosssection to make sound waves eﬃciently by itself. which is then conducted through the body and out into the air. how will the reﬂections behave? In reality. it was theoretically true that a pulse would be trapped permanently in the middle medium. This is why a guitar produces sounds that have a deﬁnite sensation of pitch. If we initially create a disturbance on a guitar string. The body. narrow pulse traveling up the neck. This is why an electric guitar with no electric pickup can hardly be heard at all. with the result that wave energy leaks out of the string even more slowly. This is clearly demonstrated by the electric guitar. Reﬂections are most intense when the two media are very dissimilar. Here the dissimilarity between the two wave media is even more pronounced. moreover.4.3. the behavior of the waves when they reach the end of the string can be understood in the same way as if the actual guitar string was attached on the ends to strings that were extremely massive. which has an extremely massive. we should expect to have an eﬀect on the manner in which sound escapes from the instrument. p/1. 3. far from being a passive frame for attaching the strings to. The motion is periodic. solid wooden body. the pulse has been inverted twice and has changed direction twice. Although this may seem like a rather bizarre physical model of the actual guitar string. the pulse has passed by every point on the string exactly twice. With every reﬂection. Now consider a guitar string.) By changing the properties of the body. and since the body is very massive. selfcheck E Notice that from p/1 to p/5. we should expect nearly 100% reﬂection. At its ends it is tied to the body of the instrument itself. the wave pattern on the string loses a tiny fraction of its energy. After reﬂection from the top end. Because the wave speed in the body is so radically diﬀerent from the speed in the string. but that pulse was not central to our discussion.4 Waves Bounded on Both Sides In the examples discussed in section 4. After two reﬂections. and in any case it was weakening severely with each partial reﬂection. let’s just imagine a wave pattern that initially consists of a single. and we may think of this triangular shape as a very broad “dent” in the string which will spread out in both directions. the ﬁnger or pick will give the string a triangular shape before letting it go. 88 Chapter 4 Bounded Waves . It is now back where it started. This means that the total distance it has traveled o / We model a guitar string attached to the guitar’s body at both ends as a lightweight string attached to extremely heavy strings at its ends. For simplicity. Now something interesting happens: ﬁgure 5 is identical to ﬁgure 1. is actually the exit path for the wave energy in the strings. it already tells us something interesting about the behavior of a guitar that we would not otherwise have understood. however. p / The motion of a pulse on the string. it is inverted. and it is also the reason why notes on an electric guitar can be sustained for longer than notes on an acoustic guitar.
The frequency is twice as high.. 3fo . This means that the period of vibration is half as long. Suppose we somehow arrange to have an initial setup consisting of two identical pulses heading toward each other. The guitar. (The eﬀect is more pronounced for wind instruments than for strings.4 Waves Bounded on Both Sides 89 . Theoretically we would need to add together inﬁnitely many such wave patterns to describe the initial triangular shape of the string exactly. . For the reasons discussed above. the threehump and fourhump waves have frequencies of 3fo and 4fo . in which half a wavelength ﬁts on the string. Given this fact. r / Using the sum of four sine waves to approximate the triangular initial shape of a plucked guitar string. and the guitar will produce the same pitch regardless of whether it is played loudly or softly. The twohump wave. Because sounds composed of this kind of pattern of frequencies are so common.equals 2L. to be discussed below.) Now there is only one hole in our reasoning. since nobody actually plays the guitar with two picks at once! But in fact it is an example of a very general fact about waves that are bounded on both sides. like just about any acoustic instrument. They will pass through each other.. as in ﬁgure q. We call its frequency fo . The onehump wave. is a little out of tune when played loudly. is very much like the twopulse example. this analysis applies to a vast range of soundproducing systems. with frequencies fo . the velocity of the wave? Answer. will behave like the single pulse we originally discussed. with one whole wavelength. Whenever a wave pattern exists in a medium bounded on both sides by media in which the wave speed is very diﬀerent. although the amplitudes required for the very high frequency parts would be very small. and an excellent approximation could be achieved with as few as ten waves. expressed in terms of L and v . undergo a single inverting reﬂection. p. the motion can be broken down into the motion of a (theoretically inﬁnite) series of sine waves. where L is the length of the string. then the velocity must be independent of amplitude. A mathematical theorem called Fourier’s theorem states that any wave can be created by superposing sine waves. including the air column within the human vocal tract. This might seem like a purely academic possibility. its frequency is 2fo . what are the period and frequency of the sound it produces. Figure r shows how even by using only four sine waves with appropriately chosen amplitudes. We thus arrive at the following very general conclusion. Similarly. 2fo . 101 Note that if the waves on the string obey the principle of superposition. we can arrive at a sum which is a decent approximation to the realistic triangular shape of a guitar string being plucked. Except for some technical details. but not exactly. Section 4. our earbrain system has evolved so q / A tricky way to double the frequency. and come back to a conﬁguration in which their positions have been exactly interchanged. but wind players are able to compensate for it. waves on a string obey the principle of superposition approximately. In reality.
Musical applications Many musicians claim to be able to pick out by ear several of the frequencies 2fo . In reality.e. It is important to realize that the term “dissonance” is not a negative one in music. G is consonant with D. it is very sensitive to clashes between the overtones of notes played simultaneously. since some of the overtones of G (x) are close to. for example. Musically knowledgeable people don’t use the word “dissonant” as a criticism of music. i. fused sensation of tone. The characteristic tone of the brass instruments.. called its timbre (rhymes with “amber”). the overtone series has two important roles in music. called overtones or harmonics of the fundamental fo . 90 Chapter 4 Bounded Waves . or without providing any contrast between dissonance and consonance. .” sung as three different musical notes. Second. No matter how long you search the radio dial.. but they are kidding themselves. in harmony.. Roughly speaking. but whose higher harmonics die down drastically as the attack changes to the sustained portion of the note. We tend to perceive a combination of notes as being dissonant if they have overtones that are close but not the same. G and C# are dissonant together. s / Graphs of loudness versus frequency for the vowel “ah. neither of which depends on this ﬁctitious ability to “hear out” the individual overtones. those of C#. the relative strengths of the overtones is an important part of the personality of a sound.. but not right on top of. 3fo . First. since every overtone of G that is close to an overtone of D (*) is at exactly the same frequency. strong overtones whose frequencies diﬀer by more than 1% and less than 10% cause the notes to sound dissonant. is a sound that starts out with a very strong harmonic series extending up to very high frequencies. Dissonance is a necessary ingredient in the creation of a musical cycle of tension and release. although the ear cannot separate the individual harmonics of a single musical tone.as to perceive them as a single. although dissonance can be used in a clumsy way. you will never hear more than three seconds of music without at least one dissonant combination of notes.
. this allows the string to vibrate at frequencies 2fo . . If you think about it. Standing waves Figure t shows sinusoidal wave patterns made by shaking a rope. Section 4. it’s not even obvious that sine waves should u / Example 7. The sine wave just creates itself automatically when you ﬁnd the right frequency. or for its own sake. In fact.4 Waves Bounded on Both Sides 91 . . . which have stationary points at the center of the string. The term “harmonic” is used here in a somewhat different sense than in physics. . You might think that I and the person in the photos had to practice for a long time in order to get such nice sine waves. a sine wave is the only shape that can create this kind of wave pattern. back in the days when people actually went to the bank.t / Standing waves on a spring. the ear perceives 2fo as the basic frequency of the note. The technique can be used in order to make it easier to play high notes in rapid passages. Harmonics on string instruments example 7 Figure u shows a violist playing what string players refer to as a natural harmonic. I used to enjoy doing this at the bank with the pens on chains. but not at the odd multiples fo . 4fo . In musical terms. because of the change in timbre. As shown in the diagram. . The musician’s pinkie is pressing very lightly against the string — not hard enough to make it touch the ﬁngerboard — at a point precisely at the center of the string’s length. called a standing wave. because no other shape is possible. 6fo . 3fo . which simply vibrates back and forth in one place without moving. Since all the overtones are multiples of 2fo . . doubling the frequency corresponds to raising the pitch by an octave..
they always cancel perfectly at the ends. Finally. The reﬂections at the open ends are densityinverting. the main diﬀerence being that we may have either inverting or noninverting reﬂections at the ends. we can actually think of a standing wave as a superposition of a moving sine wave with its own reﬂection. we can have an asymmetric tube: closed at one end and open at the other. so there is a strong reﬂection at the closed ends. Figure w shows the sound waves in and around a bamboo Japanese ﬂute called a shakuhachi. You are a standing wave! Standingwave patterns of air columns The air column inside a wind instrument behaves very much like the waveonastring example we’ve been concentrating on so far. x/2. After all. Comparing panels 1 and 2 of the ﬁgure. These reﬂections are both densitynoninverting. The speed of sound is diﬀerent in metal than in air. As the two sine waves go back and forth. It’s only necessary to know that the tubes are symmetric. it isn’t necessary to memorize which type of reﬂection is inverting and which is inverting. Other functions don’t have this property. so we get symmetric standingwave patterns. Standing wave patterns are rather important. such as the one shown in ﬁgure x/1. so the wave pattern is pinched oﬀ at the ends. in both cases the wavelength is the same: in the lowestfrequency standing wave. We can only have a standing wave pattern if there are reﬂections at the ends. Sine waves have the unique mathematical property that the sum of sine waves of equal wavelength is simply a new sine wave with the same wavelength. which is open at both ends of the air column. aren’t they? The speed isn’t supposed to be zero! Well. w / Surprisingly. Inverting reﬂection at one end and noninverting at the other Some organ pipes are closed at both ends. and we can have standing waves. sound waves undergo partial reﬂection at the open ends of tubes as well as closed ones. A common example is the concert ﬂute. y. we see that although the wave pattens are diﬀerent. The only diﬀerence is that the wave is adjusting from being a plane wave to being a spherical wave. but that is very counterintuitive — why is there any reﬂection at all. half a wavelength ﬁts inside the tube. waves are supposed to travel at a set speed. Something similar is happening here. and their sum appears to stand still. if the sound wave is free to emerge into open space. since atoms are really standingwave patterns of electron waves. 92 Chapter 4 Bounded Waves . which is moving the opposite way. so the wave has to readjust itself from one pattern to another.be able to do this trick. and the only way it can do that without developing a kink is if there is a reﬂection. and there is no change in medium? Recall the reason why we got reﬂections at a change in medium: because the wavelength changes. Thus. The standing wave with the lowest frequency is therefore one in which v / Sine waves add to make sine waves.
This will be the nexttolongest possible wavelength that allows for a point of maximum vibration at one end and a point of no vibration at the other. then the standing wave pattern must be symmetric.4 Waves Bounded on Both Sides 93 . The lowestfrequency wave ﬁts half a wavelength in the tube. p. Section 4. shown in the ﬁgure? Based on this.1/4 of a wavelength ﬁts along the length of the tube. how many times greater will its frequency be? Answer. open at one end and closed at the other. Both ends the same If both ends are open (as in the ﬂute) or both ends closed (as in some organ pipes). y / A concert ﬂute is an asymmetric air column. Points on the axis have normal air density. as shown in ﬁgure x//3. selfcheck F Draw a graph of pressure versus position for the ﬁrst overtone of the air column in a tube open at one end and closed at the other. How many times shorter will its wavelength be compared to the frequency of the lowestfrequency standing wave. 101 x / Graphs of excess density versus position for the lowestfrequency standing waves of three types of air columns. x/23.
Summary
Selected Vocabulary reﬂection . . . . . the bouncing back of part of a wave from a boundary transmission . . . the continuation of part of a wave through a boundary absorption . . . . the gradual conversion of wave energy into heating of the medium standing wave . . a wave pattern that stays in one place Notation λ. . . . . . . . . . Summary Whenever a wave encounters the boundary between two media in which its speeds are diﬀerent, part of the wave is reﬂected and part is transmitted. The reﬂection is always reversed fronttoback, but may also be inverted in amplitude. Whether the reﬂection is inverted depends on how the wave speeds in the two media compare, e.g., a wave on a string is uninverted when it is reﬂected back into a segment of string where its speed is lower. The greater the diﬀerence in wave speed between the two media, the greater the fraction of the wave energy that is reﬂected. Surprisingly, a wave in a dense material like wood will be strongly reﬂected back into the wood at a woodair boundary. A onedimensional wave conﬁned by highly reﬂective boundaries on two sides will display motion which is periodic. For example, if both reﬂections are inverting, the wave will have a period equal to twice the time required to traverse the region, or to that time divided by an integer. An important special case is a sinusoidal wave; in this case, the wave forms a stationary pattern composed of a superposition of sine waves moving in opposite direction. wavelength (Greek letter lambda)
94
Chapter 4
Bounded Waves
Problems
Key √ A computerized answer check is available online. A problem that requires calculus. A diﬃcult problem.
1 Light travels faster in warmer air. Use this fact to explain the formation of a mirage appearing like the shiny surface of a pool of water when there is a layer of hot air above a road. (For simplicity, pretend that there is actually a sharp boundary between the hot layer and the cooler layer above it.) 2 (a) Using the equations from optional section 4.2, compute the amplitude of light that is reﬂected back into air at an airwater interface, relative to the amplitude of the incident wave. The speeds of light in air and water are 3.0×108 and 2.2×108 m/s, respectively. (b) Find the energy of the reﬂected wave as a fraction of the incident energy. [Hint: The answers to the two parts are not the same.] √ 3 A Bﬂat clarinet (the most common kind) produces its lowest note, at about 230 Hz, when half of a wavelength ﬁts inside its tube. Compute the length of the clarinet. [Check: The actual length of a clarinet is about 67 cm from the tip of the mouthpiece to the end of the bell. Because the behavior of the clarinet and its coupling to air outside it is a little more complex than that of a simple tube enclosing a cylindrical air column, your answer will be close to this value, but not exactly equal to it.] 4 (a) A good tenor saxophone player can play all of the following notes without changing her ﬁngering, simply by altering the tightness of her lips: E (150 Hz), E (300 Hz), B (450 Hz), and E (600 Hz). How is this possible? (b) Some saxophone players are known for their ability to use this technique to play “freak notes,” i.e., notes above the normal range of the instrument. Why isn’t it possible to play notes below the normal range using this technique? 5 The table gives the frequencies of the notes that make up the key of F major, starting from middle C and going up through all seven notes. (a) Calculate the ﬁrst ﬁve or six harmonics of C and G, and determine whether these two notes will be consonant or dissonant. (b) Do the same for C and B . [Hint: Remember that harmonics that diﬀer by about 110% cause dissonance.] 6 Brass and wind instruments go up in pitch as the musician warms up. Suppose a particular trumpet’s frequency goes up by 1.2%. Let’s consider possible physical reasons for the change in pitch. (a) Solids generally expand with increasing temperature, because the stronger random motion of the atoms tends to bump them apart. Brass expands by 1.88 × 10−5 per degree C. Would this tend C D E F G A B 261.6 Hz 293.7 329.6 349.2 392.0 440.0 466.2
Problem 5.
Problems
95
to raise the pitch, or lower it? Estimate the size of the eﬀect in comparison with the observed change in frequency. (b) The speed of sound in a gas is proportional to the square root of the absolute temperature, where zero absolute temperature is 273 degrees C. As in part a, analyze the size and direction of the eﬀect. (c) Determine the change in temperature, in units of degrees C, that would account for the observed eﬀect. 7 Your exhaled breath contains about 4.5% carbon dioxide, and is therefore more dense than fresh air by about 2.3%. By analogy with the treatment of waves on a string in section 3.2, we expect that the speed of sound will be inversely proportional to the square root of the density of the gas. Calculate the eﬀect on the frequency produced by a wind instrument.
96
Chapter 4
Bounded Waves
Appendix 1: Exercises Exercise 1A: Vibrations Equipment: • air track and carts of two diﬀerent masses • springs • spring scales Place the cart on the air track and attach springs so that it can vibrate. what is its slope? 4. Test the equation T = 2π m/k numerically. Does the period change by the expected factor. . Use a spring scale to pull the cart away from equilibrium. 2. Is it linear? If so. Test whether the period of vibration depends on amplitude. based on the equation T = 2π m/k? 3. for which the springs do not go slack. Try at least two moderate amplitudes. and make a graph of force versus position. Try a cart with a diﬀerent mass. 1. and at least one amplitude that is large enough so that they do go slack.
2. Compare the Q values of the two oscillators.Exercise 2A: Worksheet on Resonance 1. Match the xt graphs in #2 with the amplitudefrequency graphs below. Compare the oscillator’s energies at A. 98 Appendix 1: Exercises . C. and D. B. 3.
62 Fetus: Image of the author’s daughter.D. In a few cases. The early editions of these books never had their copyrights renewed. 2d 191. olekils at web. 93 Flute: Wikipedia user Grendelkhan. and are copyleft licensed under the same license as the rest of the book. if the photo credit says “courtesy of . dedicated to the public domain by user Tsca. 75 Human crosssection: Courtesy of the Visible Human Project. 25 Tacoma Narrows Bridge: Public domain. because I’m using the images for educational purposes. In particular. and in translations after December 31. public domain. I have only used them when it was clear that they were originally taken from public domain sources. GFDL licensed (Wikimedia Commons). but I don’t know the name of the artist or photographer. Contents Bridge. ESA.S.S. and Vollrath. and are now therefore in the public domain.N. I am not a lawyer.” Credits to Millikan and Gale refer to the textbooks Practical Physics (1920) and Elements of Physics (1927). 21 Jupiter: Uncopyrighted image from the Voyager probe. U. 36 F. public domain. by the Physical Science Study Committee. Supp. since products of federal agencies fall into the public domain.S. When “PSSC Physics” is given as a credit.Appendix 2: Photo Credits Except as speciﬁcally noted below or in a parenthetical credit in the caption of a ﬁgure. (Bridgeman Art Library. LBNL. Line art by the author. In some cases it’s clear from the date that the ﬁgure is public domain. Wikipedia user janderk.org. Corel Corp.. galaxy: see below. 44 Spider oscillations: Emile. I have assumed that images that come from U. Navy photo by Ensign John Gay. public domain. National Library of Medicine. 65 Doppler eﬀect for water waves: PSSC Physics. US NIH. 69 Jet breaking the sound barrier: Public domain product of the U. Beckwith (STScI). and The Hubble Heritage Team (STScI/AURA). xray. I’ve included some publicdomain paintings. 62 Changing wavelength: PSSC Physics. 52 Breaking wave: Ole Kils. surfer. so you should not assume that it’s legal for you to use these images. fair use law may give you less leeway than it gives me. 76 Reﬂection of ﬁsh: Jan Derk. MRI. I would be grateful to anyone who could help me to give proper credit. Likewise. but that doesn’t mean you have permission to use it. Malladi... ccbysa licensed. 51 Marker on spring as pulse passes by: PSSC Physics.” that means the copyright owner gave me permission to use it. GFDL licensed. GFDL licensed (Wikipedia). 1970. all the illustrations in this book are under my own copyright. Ltd. 77 Reﬂection of circular waves: PSSC Physics. S.de. However. 1999). v. 50 Superposition of pulses: Photo from PSSC Physics.Y. 66 Doppler radar: Public domain image by NOAA.S. an agency of the U. (The 1927 version did not have its copyright renewed. government web pages are copyrightfree. S. and the laws on fair use are vague. which states on the copyright page that “The materials taken from the original and second editions and the Advanced Topics of PSSC PHYSICS included in this text will be available to all publishers for use in English after December 31. There is also a blanket permission given in the later PSSC College Physics edition. photographic reproductions of them are not copyrightable in the U. 80 Xray image of hand: 1896 image produced by Roentgen. courtesy of NASA. 52 Surﬁng (hand drag): Stan Shebs. 88 Photo of guitar: Wikimedia Commons. Both are public domain. from Stillman Fires Collection: Tacoma Fire Dept. 78 Reﬂection of pulses: Photo from PSSC Physics. 69 X15: NASA. courtesy of the UC Berkeley Earth Sciences and Map Library. . it indicates that the ﬁgure is from the ﬁrst edition of the textbook entitled Physics.) Since is possible that some of the illustrations in the 1927 version had their copyrights renewed and are still under copyright.archive.S. 1975. 37 Threedimensional brain: R. federal government. 68 Mount Wilson: Andrew Dunn. 61 Wavelengths of circular and linear waves: PSSC Physics. 33 Nimitz Freeway: Unknown photographer. 77 Reﬂection of pulses: PSSC Physics. 91 Standing waves: PSSC Physics. 67 M51 galaxy: public domain Hubble Space Telescope image. government. ?? Painting of waves: Katsushika Hokusai (17601849). 37 Twodimensional MRI: Image of the author’s wife. Le Floch.. I have made use of images under the fair use doctrine. Nature 440:621 (2006). www. and giving the book away for free.
is the same as the speed of a loud sound.. the trailing edge is moving down. selfcheck A: The leading edge is moving up. The typical greenish color of the coatings shows that they do the worst job for green light. and the top of the hump is motionless for one instant. The velocity of a wave ordinarily only depends on the medium. It loses three quarters of its energy with each cycle. The speed of a soft sound. Shrinking the amplitude does not make the cyles and faster. for example. selfcheck D: 1. Optimal performance can therefore only be produced for one speciﬁc color of light. selfcheck C: She should tap the wine glasses she ﬁnds in the store and look for one with a high Q. Page 30. selfcheck B: A substance is invisible to sonar if the speed of sound waves in it is the same as in water. Answers to SelfChecks for Chapter 3 Page 77. making it more likely to break. selfcheck A: The energy of a wave is usually proportional to the square of its amplitude. not the amplitude. A material object that loses kinetic energy slows down.e.Appendix 3: Hints and Solutions Answers to SelfChecks Answers to SelfChecks for Chapter 2 Page 29. Page 77. but a wave is not a material object. Answers to SelfChecks for Chapter 4 Page 79. The one with the highest Q will have the highestamplitude response to her driving force. Reﬂections only occur at boundaries between media in which the wave speed is diﬀerent. No. selfcheck C: No. and . Page 87. and the period of the vibrations is independent of amplitude. one whose vibrations die out very slowly. Page 35. selfcheck B: Energy is proportional to the square of the amplitude. so the energy is the same. selfcheck A: The horizontal axis is a time axis. the thickness of the coating must be such that the second reﬂected wave train lags behind the ﬁrst by an integer number of wavelengths. Answers to SelfChecks for Chapter 3 Page 51. i. so its energy is four times smaller after every cycle. To get the best possible interference. Light can be reﬂected either from the outer surface of the ﬁlm or from the inner surface. Squaring a negative number gives a positive result. 2.
. The frequency is f = 1/T = v/2L. and at a particular place on the soap bubble. so the wavelength is three times shorter than that of the lowestfrequency mode. 2fo . 4fo . while another part. 101 . say red. . . Page 93. We see a pattern that varies across the surface because its thickness isn’t constant.. blue for example. 5fo . We see rainbow colors because the condition for destructive or constructive interference depends on wavelength. Instead of fo . may be reﬂected strongly. is almost entirely transmitted. Page 88. 3fo . the frequency is three times higher. the pattern of wave frequencies of this air column goes fo . selfcheck E: The period is the time required to travel a distance 2L at speed v. . part of that mixture. selfcheck F: The wave pattern will look like this: . Since the wavelength is smaller by a factor of three. Three quarters of a wavelength ﬁt in the tube. in which one quarter of a wave ﬁts. 3fo . 7fo . . T = 2L/v. .there can be either constructive or destructive interference between the two reﬂections. White light is a mixture of all the colors of the rainbow.
31 timbre. 90 period deﬁned. 13 principle of superposition. 90 tuning fork. 15 overtones. 31 eardrum. 17. 31 Einstein. 27 exponential decay deﬁned. 76 resonance deﬁned. 90 Galileo. 31 swing. 65 driving force. 89 frequency deﬁned. 15. 86 light. 29 Fourier’s theorem.Index absorption of waves. 49 simple harmonic motion deﬁned. 18 sound. 17 work done by a varying force. 27 comet. 14 energy related to amplitude. 18 period of. 90 Hooke’s law. 79 amplitude deﬁned. 33 . Albert. 20 quality factor deﬁned. 91 steadystate behavior. 19 Halley’s Comet. 58 motion periodic. 49 pulse deﬁned. 16 related to energy. 52 standing wave. 18 interference eﬀects. 28 Doppler eﬀect. 58 speed of. 15 fundamental. 13 harmonics. 16 peaktopeak. 13 damping deﬁned. 15 pitch. 29 decibel scale. 30 reﬂection of waves.
Index 103 .
104 Index .
Index 105 .
For comparison.4 × 103 1. since they have fuzzy surfaces. 1 W = 1 J/s (varies) s Hz m unitless Hz symbol x. ∆x t.1 Relationships among U. i. 1000 calories.49 × 108 3.18 J 4.675 × 10−27 radius (fm) 0.673 × 10−27 1. Subatomic Particles particle electron proton neutron mass (kg) 9.109 × 10−31 1.1 ∼ 1.78 × 103 cm3 746 W Speeds of Light and Sound speed of light speed of sound c = 3.e.Useful Data Metric Preﬁxes Mkmµ. m second.84 × 105 — The radii of protons and neutrons can only be given approximately.S.00 × 108 m/s c = 340 m/s When speaking of food energy. kg kg/m3 m/s m/s2 J/kg·m or m/s2 newton.18 × 103 J 3. Moon.7 × 103 7. 106 Index .4 mm (by deﬁnition) 4. units: 1 foot (ft) = 12 inches 1 yard (yd) = 3 feet 1 mile (mi) = 5280 feet Earth. and Sun body earth moon sun mass (kg) 5.01 ∼ 1. the word “Calorie” is used to mean 1 kcal. is used only in the centimeter.0 × 105 radius of orbit (km) 1. 1 N=1 kg·m/s2 1 Pa=1 N/m2 joule. ∆t m ρ v a g F P E P A T f λ Q FWHM (Centi. s kilogram.5 newtons of force 2.(Greek mu) npfmegakilomillimicronanopicofemto106 103 10−3 10−6 10−9 10−12 10−15 Notation and Units quantity distance time mass density velocity acceleration gravitational ﬁeld force pressure energy power amplitude period frequency wavelength quality factor FWHM unit meter..97 × 1024 7. J watt. a typical atom is about a million fm in radius. In writing.35 × 1022 1.99 × 1030 radius (km) 6. 10−2 . the capital C may be used to indicate 1 Calorie=1000 calories.) The Greek Alphabet α β γ δ ζ η θ ι κ λ µ A B Γ ∆ E Z H Θ I K Λ M alpha beta gamma delta epsilon zeta eta theta iota kappa lambda mu ν ξ o π ρ σ τ υ φ χ ψ ω N Ξ O Π P Σ T Y Φ X Ψ Ω nu xi omicron pi rho sigma tau upsilon phi chi psi omega Conversions Nonmetric units in terms of metric ones: 1 inch 1 poundforce (1 kg) · g 1 scientiﬁc calorie 1 kcal 1 gallon 1 horsepower = = = = = = = 25.2 poundsforce 4.
This action might not be possible to undo. Are you sure you want to continue?
We've moved you to where you read on your other device.
Get the full title to continue reading from where you left off, or restart the preview.